WO2008025540A1 - Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds - Google Patents

Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2008025540A1
WO2008025540A1 PCT/EP2007/007557 EP2007007557W WO2008025540A1 WO 2008025540 A1 WO2008025540 A1 WO 2008025540A1 EP 2007007557 W EP2007007557 W EP 2007007557W WO 2008025540 A1 WO2008025540 A1 WO 2008025540A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
cycloalkyl
mmol
unsubstituted
hydrogen
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2007/007557
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Claus Kremoser
Ulrich Deuschle
Ulrich Abel
Andreas Schulz
Original Assignee
Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag filed Critical Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag
Priority to BRPI0715448-8A priority Critical patent/BRPI0715448A2/en
Priority to AT07801978T priority patent/ATE555105T1/en
Priority to CN2007800323928A priority patent/CN101511813B/en
Priority to CA2661861A priority patent/CA2661861C/en
Priority to JP2009525977A priority patent/JP2010501610A/en
Priority to KR1020097006357A priority patent/KR101103884B1/en
Priority to MX2009002274A priority patent/MX2009002274A/en
Priority to AU2007291514A priority patent/AU2007291514B2/en
Priority to US12/376,482 priority patent/US20100184809A1/en
Priority to EP07801978A priority patent/EP2084147B1/en
Publication of WO2008025540A1 publication Critical patent/WO2008025540A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/08—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the prostate
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A61P31/06—Antibacterial agents for tuberculosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A61P31/08—Antibacterial agents for leprosy
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02—Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds which bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR).
  • the invention further relates to the use of the compounds for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of diseases and/or conditions through binding of said nuclear receptor by said compounds, and to a process for the synthesis of said compounds.
  • Multicellular organisms are dependent on advanced mechanisms of information transfer between cells and body compartments.
  • the information that is transmitted can be highly complex and can result in the alteration of genetic programs involved in cellular differentiation, proliferation, or reproduction.
  • the signals, or hormones are often low molecular weight molecules, such as peptides, fatty acid, or cholesterol derivatives.
  • NR nuclear receptors
  • steroid hormones vitamin D, ecdysone, cis and trans retinoic acid
  • thyroid hormone bile acids
  • cholesterol-derivatives fatty acids (and other peroxisomal proliferators)
  • orphan receptors proteins that are structurally similar to other members of this group, but for which no ligands are known.
  • Orphan receptors may be indicative of unknown signalling pathways in the cell or may be nuclear receptors that function without ligand activation. The activation of transcription by some of these orphan receptors may occur in the absence of an exogenous ligand and/or through signal transduction pathways originating from the cell surface (D. Mangelsdorf et al. "The nuclear receptor superfamily: the second decade", Cell 1995, 83(6), 835-839; R Evans “The nuclear receptor superfamily: a rosetta stone for physiology” MoI. Endocrinol. 2005, 19(6), 1429-1438).
  • a DNA-binding domain hereinafter referred to as "DBD” usually comprises two zinc finger elements and recognizes a specific Hormone Responsive Element hereinafter referred to as "HRE" within the promoters of responsive genes. Specific amino acid residues in the “DBD” have been shown to confer DNA sequence binding specificity (M. Schena "Mammalian glucocorticoid receptor derivatives enhance transcription in yeast", Science 1988, 241(4868), 965-967).
  • a ligand-binding-domain hereinafter referred to as "LBD” is at the carboxy-terminal region of known NRs.
  • Nuclear receptor modulators like steroid hormones affect the growth and function of specific cells by binding to intracellular receptors and forming nuclear receptor-ligand complexes. Nuclear receptor-hormone complexes then interact with a hormone response element (HRE) in the control region of specific genes and alter specific gene expression (A. Aranda, A. Pascual "Nuclear hormone receptors and gene expression” Physiol. Rev. 2001 , 81(3), 1269-1304).
  • HRE hormone response element
  • the Farnesoid X Receptor alpha (hereinafter also often referred to as NR1 H4 when referring to the human receptor) is a prototypical type 2 nuclear receptor which activates genes upon binding to promoter region of target genes in a heterodimeric fashion with Retinoid X Receptor (B.
  • NR1H4 fatty acids
  • bile acids D. Parks et al. "Bile acids: natural ligands for an orphan nuclear receptor” Science 1999, 284(5418), 1365-1368; M. Makishima et al. "Identification of a nuclear receptor for bile acids” Science 1999, 284(5418), 1362-1365).
  • the most potent one is chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA), which regulates the expression of several genes that participate in bile acid homeostasis.
  • CDCA chenodeoxycholic acid
  • FXR modulators Small molecule compounds which act as FXR modulators have been disclosed in the following publications: WO 2004/048349, WO 2003/015771 and WO 2000/037077. Further small molecule FXR modulators have been recently reviewed (R. C. Buijsman et al. "Non-Steroidal Steroid Receptor Modulators” Curr. Med. Chem. 2005, 12, 1017- 1075).
  • Some relevant physicochemical and ADME parameters include but are not limited to: aqueous solubility, logD, PAMPA permeability, Caco-2 permeability, plasma protein binding, microsomal stability and hepatocyte stability.
  • Poor aqueous solubility can limit the absorption of compounds from the gastrointestinal (Gl) tract, resulting in reduced oral bioavailability. It may also necessitate novel formulation strategies and hence increase cost and delays. Moreover, compound solubility can affect other in vitro assays. Poor aqueous solubility is an undesired characteristic and it is the largest physicochemical problem hindering oral drug activity (C. A. Lipinski "Drug-like properties and the causes of poor solubility and poor permeability", J. Pharmacol. Toxicol. Methods 2000, 44, 235-249).
  • Lipophilicity is a key determinant of the pharmacokinetic behaviour of drugs. It can influence distribution into tissues, absorption and the binding characteristics of a drug, as well as being an important factor in determining the solubility of a compound. LogD (distribution coefficient) is used as a measure of lipophilicity.
  • One of the most common methods for determining this parameter is by measuring the partition of a compound between an organic solvent (typically octanol) and aqueous buffer.
  • An optimal range for lipophilicity tends to be if the compound has a logD value between 0 and 3.
  • these compounds have a good balance between solubility and permeability and this range tends to be optimal for oral absorption and cell membrane permeation.
  • Hydrophilic compounds typically are highly soluble but exhibit low permeability across the gastrointestinal tract or blood brain barrier.
  • Highly lipophilic compounds (logD > 5) exhibit problems with metabolic instability, high plasma protein binding and low solubility which leads to variable and poor oral absorption (L. Di, E. Kerns "Profiling drug-like properties in discovery research” Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2003, 7, 402-408).
  • Drug permeability through cell monolayers or artificial membranes correlates well with intestinal permeability and oral bioavailability.
  • Drugs with low membrane permeability i.e. low lipophilicity, are generally absorbed slowly from solution in the stomach and small intestine. Knowing the rate and extent of absorption across the intestinal tract is critical if a drug is to be orally delivered. Drug permeability cannot be accurately predicted by physicochemical factors alone because there are many drug transport pathways.
  • PAMPA parallel artificial membrane permeability assay
  • Plasma protein binding can significantly affect the therapeutic action of a drug. It determines the extent and duration of action because only unbound drug is thought to be available for passive diffusion to extravascular space or tissue sites where therapeutic effects occur.
  • the level of PPB is important for predicting the pharmacokinetic profile of a drug and determining appropriate oral dosing. In vivo dose levels can be estimated from the determined fraction of unbound drug (fu); an increase in dose may be necessary if a drug is highly bound to plasma (Y. Kwon "Handbook of essential pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and drug metabolism for industrial scientists" Springer Verlag 2001 ).
  • the microsomal stability screen is often used as a primary screen early in the drug discovery process.
  • the hepatocyte stability assay is used as a secondary screen for the more favourable compounds discovered from the primary screen (T. Iwatsubo et al. "Prediction of in vivo drug metabolism in the human liver from in vitro metabolism data", Pharm. Ther. 1997, 73, 147-171).
  • favourable physicochemical and in vitro ADME parameters are prerequisite for a favourable pharmacokinetic (PK) profile of a drug.
  • PK pharmacokinetic
  • PK data can also help in the design or species selection of preclinical toxicology studies. Pharmacokinetic studies are part of the regulatory drug development requirements and have also started to become an integral part of the early drug discovery process.
  • Physicochemical and ADME properties affect drug pharmacokinetics and can be assessed by in vitro methods.
  • FXR modulating compounds described herein show improved physicochemical and/or ADME parameters in vitro resulting in advanced pharmacokinetic properties, i.e. a superior bioavailability and a favourable half life in vivo in comparison to the compounds disclosed in the prior art.
  • the present invention relates to compounds according to the general formula (I) which bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1H4 receptor (FXR).
  • the invention further relates to the use of said compounds for the preparation of medicaments for the treatment of diseases and/or conditions through binding of said nuclear receptor by said compounds.
  • the invention further also describes a method for the synthesis of said compounds.
  • the compounds of the present invention show improved physicochemical and/or ADME parameters in vitro finally resulting in advanced pharmacokinetic properties in vivo.
  • the compounds of the present invention are defined by formula (I):
  • R 3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, CrC 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -NR 19 R 20 NR 19 S(O) 01 R 20 , NR 19 C(O)OR 20 , NR 19 C(O)R 20 , NR 19 C(O)NR 19 R 20 , OR 19 OC(O)R 19 , S(O) 1 R 19 , SO 2 NR 19 C(O)R 20 , S(O) m NR 19 R 20 , C(O)R 19 , C(O)OR 20 , C(O)NR 19 R 20 C(NR 19 JNR 19 R 20 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted
  • R 19 and R 20 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC 6 -alkyl, C 2 -C 6 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 -cycloalky, or R 19 and R 20 together may form a 3-7- membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, and wherein the CrC 6 -alkyl, C 2 -C 6 - alkenyl, C 3 -C 6 -cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 ;
  • R 4 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR 15 R 16 , NR 15 SO 2 R 16 , NR 15 C(O)OR 16 , NR 15 C(O)R 16 , NR 15 C(O)NR 15 R 16 , NR 15 C(NCN)NR 15 R 16 , OR 15 OC(O)R 15 , S(O) 1 R 15 , SO 2 NR 15 C(O)R 16 , S(O) m NR 15 R 16 , SC(O)R 15 , C(O)R 15 , C(O)OR 15 , C(O)NR 15 R 16 C(O)NHOR 15 , C(O)SR 15 , C(NR 15 )NR 15 R 16 wherein
  • R 15 and R 16 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, Ci-Ce-alkyl, C 2 -C 6 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 -cycloalkyl; or R 15 and R 16 together may form a 3-7- membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, and wherein the C r C 6 -alkyl, C 2 -C 6 - alkenyl, C 3 -C 6 -cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 ;
  • Q is O or NR 7 ;
  • R 7 is hydrogen, C r C 3 -alkyl, or C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
  • T is -O-, -S-, -N(R 14 )-, CH 2 or CF 2 ;
  • R 14 is hydrogen, C r C 3 -alkyl, or C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
  • Y is selected from Y 1 to Y 6
  • R 8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, CrC 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR 12 R 13 , NR 12 S(O) m R 13 , NR 12 C(O)OR 13 , NR 12 C(O)R 13 , NR 12 C(O)NR 12 R 13 , OR 12 OC(O)R 12 , S(O) 1 R 12 , SO 2 NR 12 C(O)R 13 , S(O) m NR 12 R 13 , C(O)R 12 , C(O)OR 12 , C(O)NR 12 R 13 and C(NR 12 )NR 12 R 13 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is un
  • L is a bond, -C(O)N(R 10 )-, -S(O) m N(R 10 )-, -G-N(R 10 )-, -N(R 10 )C(O)-, -N(R 10 )S(O) m -, -N(R 10 J-G-, -G-S-, -G-O-, -S-G-, or O-G; or L is
  • R 10 is hydrogen, Ci-C 3 -alkyl, or C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
  • G is methylene or ethylene which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
  • Z is phenyl-A-R 9 , pyridyl-A-R 9 , pyrimidyl-A-R 9 or pyridazyl-A-R 9 , wherein phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl or pyridazyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three groups selected from halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, cyano, OH, OCH 3 , OCH 2 F, OCHF 2 , OCF 3 , SCF 3 , NH 2 , NHCH 3 and N(CH 3 ) 2 ;
  • A is a bond, CH 2 , CHCH 3 , C(CH 3 ) 2 or CF 2 ;
  • R 9 is hydrogen, COOR 17 , CONR 17 R 18 , C(O)NHSO 2 R 17 , SO 2 NHC(O)R 17 , S(O) m R 17 , C(NR 17 JNR 17 R 18 , or tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom;
  • R 17 and R 18 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC 6 -alkyl, C 2 -C 6 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, and C 3 -C 6 -cycloalkyl; or R 17 and R 18 together may form a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 ; a is O or 1 ; b is 1 , 2, or 3; c is 1 or 2; i is O, 1 , or
  • each X 1 , X 2 and X 4 R 3 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, NR 19 R 20 or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 , preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 , and that in each X 3 R 3 is hydrogen, Ci -6 alkyl or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 , preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 .
  • R 19 and R 20 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC 6 alkyl and C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl.
  • R 19 and R 20 preferably form together a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring.
  • the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or heteroaromatic groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R 11 , preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 .
  • Q is O or NH.
  • R 4 is preferably selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1-6 alkyl, O-C r C 6 alkyl, and CN, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R 11 , preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 . More preferably, R 4 is selected from hydrogen, halogen and Ci -6 alkyl wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted by one, two or three substituents R 11 .
  • the index b preferably is 1 or 2; most preferably b is 2.
  • the radical R 4 may be located on any position of the phenyl ring.
  • R 4 is located on the 2- and/or 4- and/or 6-position of the phenyl ring.
  • R 4 is located on the 2- and 6-position of the phenyl ring.
  • T is O, CH 2 or NR 14 wherein R 14 is as defined above.
  • Y is preferably selected from Y 1 , Y 2 and Y 3 wherein R 8 and c are defined as above.
  • R 8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C r C 6 alkyl, OR 12 , NR 12 R 13 , C(O)R 12 and C(O)OR 12 wherein each alkyl is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R 11 , preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 and wherein
  • R 12 and R 13 are defined as above. More preferably, R 12 and R 13 are independently selected from hydrogen and CrC 6 alkyl. In a further preferred embodiment R 8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C r C 6 -alkyl, or O-C r C 3 -alkyl, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents
  • R 11 preferably one, two or three substituents R 11 .
  • L is preferably a bond, -C(O)N(R 10 )-, -S(O)iN(R 10 )-, -G-N(R 10 )-, or-N(R 10 )-G, wherein R 10 is hydrogen or C r C 6 -alkyl and i is 2.
  • Z is phenyl-A-R 9 , wherein phenyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to three groups selected from halogen, cyano, Ci -4 alkyl, OH, OCH 3 , OCH 2 F, OCHF 2 , OCF 3 , SCF 3 , NH 2 , NHCH 3 and N(CH 3 ) 2 .
  • R 9 is selected from COOR 17 , CONH 2 and CONR 17 R 18 .
  • R 17 is preferably independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl and C 3-6 cycloalkyl and R 18 is preferably selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci -6 alkyl and C 3-6 cycloalkyl or R 17 and R 18 form together a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring.
  • the C 1 -C 6 alkyl group in said embodiment is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R 11 whereby R 11 is selected from the group consisting of OH, NH 2 , NH(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) and N(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) 2 .
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, COOH and tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom. More preferably, R 9 is selected from the group consisting of COOH and tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom.
  • Preferred compounds of formula (I) are those compounds in which one or more of the residues contained therein have the meanings given above. It is understood, that the claimed compounds cover any compound obtained by combining any of the definitions disclosed within this description for the various substituents. With respect to all compounds of formula (I), the present invention also includes all tautomeric and stereoisomeric forms, solvates and mixtures thereof in all ratios, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • Aryl is an aromatic mono- or polycyclic moiety with preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms which is preferably selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, fluorenyl, indenyl and phenanthrenyl, more preferably phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Heteroaryl is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic moiety having 5 to 20 carbon atoms with at least one ring containing a heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S, or heteroaryl is an aromatic ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S and 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • heteroaryl contains 1 to 4, more preferably 1 , 2 or 3 heteroatoms selected from O and/or N and is preferably selected from pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolizinyl, phthalazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, isoindolyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl,
  • Preferred heteroaryl includes pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl.
  • Heterocyclyl is a 3 to 10-membered saturated or unsaturated ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S and 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • heterocyclyl contains 1 to 4, more preferably 1 , 2 or 3 heteroatoms selected from O and/or N.
  • Heterocyclyl includes mono- and bicyclic ringsystems and is preferably selected from pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thioxanyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, homopiperidinyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, oxazepinyl, diazepinyl, thiazepinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2-pyrrolinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, indolinyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, dioxanyl,
  • C 1 -C 6 Alkyl is a saturated hydrocarbon moiety, namely straight chain or branched alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl.
  • Cycloalkyl is an alkyl ring having 3 to 6 carbons, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
  • Carbocyclyl is a monocyclic or polycyclic ring system of 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may be saturated or unsaturated.
  • the term “carbocyclyl” includes cycloalkyls as defined above as well as partially unsaturated carbocyclic groups such as cyclopentene, cyclopentadiene or cyclohexene.
  • C 2 -C 6 Alkenyl is an unsaturated hydrocarbon moiety with one or more double bonds, preferably one double bond, namely straight chain or branched alkenyl having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, methallyl, buten-2-yl, buten-3-yl, penten-2-yl, penten-3-yl, penten-4-yl, 3-methyl-but-3-enyl, 2-methyl-but-3-enyl, 1-methyl-but-3-enyl or hexenyl.
  • C 2 -C 6 Alkynyl is an unsaturated hydrocarbon moiety with one or more triple bonds, preferably one triple bond, namely straight chain or branched alkynyl having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propynyl, butyn-2-yl, butyn-3-yl, pentyn-2-yl, pentyn-3- yl, pentyn-4-yl, 2-methyl-but-3-ynyl, 1 -methyl-but-3-ynyl or hexynyl.
  • Halo or halogen is a halogen atom selected from F, Cl, Br and I, preferably F, Cl and Br.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be in the form of a prodrug compound.
  • Prodrug compound means a derivative that is converted into a compound according to the present invention by a reaction with an enzyme, gastric acid or the like under a physiological condition in the living body, e.g. by oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis or the like, each of which is carried out enzymatically.
  • prodrug examples include compounds, wherein the amino group in a compound of the present invention is acylated, alkylated or phosphorylated to form, e.g., eicosanoylamino, alanylamino, pivaloyloxymethylamino or wherein the hydroxyl group is acylated, alkylated, phosphorylated or converted into the borate, e.g. acetyloxy, palmitoyloxy, pivaloyloxy, succinyloxy, fumaryloxy, alanyloxy or wherein the carboxyl group is esterified or amidated.
  • these compounds can be produced from compounds of the present invention according to well-known methods.
  • prodrug examples are compounds, wherein the carboxylate in a compound of the present invention is, for example, converted into an alkyl-, aryl-, choline-, amino, acyloxymethylester, linolenoyl-ester.
  • Metabolites of compounds of the present invention are also within the scope of the present invention.
  • tautomerism like e.g. keto-enol tautomerism
  • the individual forms like e.g. the keto and enol form, are each within the scope of the invention as well as their mixtures in any ratio. Same applies for stereoisomers, like e.g. enantiomers, cis/trans isomers, conformers and the like.
  • isomers can be separated by methods well known in the art, e.g. by liquid chromatography. Same applies for enantiomers by using e.g. chiral stationary phases. Additionally, enantiomers may be isolated by converting them into diastereomers, i.e. coupling with an enantiomerically pure auxiliary compound, subsequent separation of the resulting diastereomers and cleavage of the auxiliary residue. Alternatively, any enantiomer of a compound of the present invention may be obtained from stereoselective synthesis using optically pure starting materials.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids, including inorganic bases or acids and organic bases or acids.
  • the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts.
  • the compounds of the present invention which contain acidic groups can be present on these groups and can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or ammonium salts.
  • salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids.
  • the compounds of the present invention which contain one or more basic groups, i.e. groups which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids.
  • acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known to the person skilled in the art.
  • the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions).
  • inner salts or betaines can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example, by contacting these with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts.
  • the present invention also includes all salts of the compounds of the present invention which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of the present invention, or a prodrug compound thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof as active ingredient together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • “Pharmaceutical composition” means one or more active ingredients, and one or more inert ingredients that make up the carrier, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing at least one compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention may additionally comprise one or more other compounds as active ingredients like a prodrug compound or other nuclear receptor modulators.
  • compositions are suitable for oral, rectal, topical, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous), ocular (ophthalmic), pulmonary (nasal or buccal inhalation) or nasal administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the conditions being treated and on the nature of the active ingredient. They may be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well-known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the compounds of the present invention bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR).
  • FXR is proposed to be a nuclear bile acid sensor. As a result, it modulates both, the synthetic output of bile acids in the liver and their recycling in the intestine (by regulating bile acid binding proteins). But beyond bile acid physiology, FXR seems to be involved in the regulation of many diverse physiological processes which are relevant in the etiology and for the treatment of diseases as diverse as cholesterol gallstones, metabolic disorders such as Type Il Diabetes, dyslipidemias or obesity, chronic inflammatory diseases such as Inflammatory Bowel Diseases or chronic intrahepatic forms of cholestasis and many others diseases (T. Claudel et al.
  • FXR regulates a complex pattern of response genes in the liver.
  • the gene products have impact on diverse physiological processes.
  • the first regulatory network that was analyzed was the regulation of bile acid synthesis. While the LXRs induce the key enzyme of the conversion of cholesterol into bile acids, Cyp7A1 , via the induction of the regulatory nuclear receptor LRH-1 , FXR represses the induction of Cyp7A1 via the upregulation of mRNA encoding SHP, a further nuclear receptor that is dominant repressive over LRH-1.
  • FXR binds the end products of this pathway
  • primary bile acids such as cholic acid (CA) or chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA)
  • CA cholic acid
  • DCA chenodeoxycholic acid
  • B. Goodwin et al. A regulatory cascade of the nuclear receptors FXR, SHP-1 , and LRH-1 represses bile acid biosynthesis" MoI. Cell 2000, 6(3), 517-526; T. Lu et al. "Molecular basis for feedback regulation of bile acid synthesis by nuclear receptors" MoI. Cell 2000, 6(3), 507-515).
  • FXR parallel to the repression of bile acid synthesis via SHP, FXR induces a range of so-called ABC (for ATP-binding cassette) transporters that are responsible for the export of toxic bile acids from the hepatocyte cytosol into the canaliculi, the small bile duct ramifications where the bile originates.
  • ABC for ATP-binding cassette
  • FXR seems to be the major metabolite sensor and regulator for the synthesis, export and re-circulation of bile acids
  • FXR ligands to induce bile flow and change bile acid composition towards more hydrophilic composition.
  • This hepatoprotective effect was further narrowed down to an anti-fibrotic effect that results from the repression of Tissue Inhibitors of Matrix-Metalloproteinases, TIMP-1 and 2, the induction of collagen-deposit resolving Matrix-Metalloproteinase 2 (MMP-2) in hepatic stellate cells and the subsequent reduction of alpha-collagen mRNA and Transforming growth factor beta (TGF-beta) mRNA which are both pro-fibrotic factors by FXR agonists (S. Fiorucci et al.
  • the nuclear receptor SHP mediates inhibition of hepatic stellate cells by FXR and protects against liver fibrosis
  • S. Fiorucci et al. A farnesoid x receptor-small heterodimer partner regulatory cascade modulates tissue metalloproteinase inhibitor-1 and matrix metalloprotease expression in hepatic stellate cells and promotes resolution of liver fibrosis' ⁇ . Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 314(2), 584-595).
  • the anti-fibrotic activity of FXR is at least partially mediated by the induction of PPARgamma, a further nuclear receptor, with which anti-fibrotic activity is associated (S.
  • Fiorucci et al. "Cross-talk between farnesoid-X-receptor (FXR) and peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma contributes to the antifibrotic activity of FXR ligands in rodent models of liver cirrhosis" J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 315(1), 58-68; A. GaIIi et al. "Antidiabetic thiazolidinediones inhibit collagen synthesis and hepatic stellate cell activation in vivo and in vitro" Gastroenterology 2002, 122(7), 1924-1940; I.
  • FXR polymorphisms map as quantitative trait loci as one factor contributing to gallstone disease (H. Wittenburg “FXR and ABCG5/ABCG8 as determinants of cholesterol gallstone formation from quantitative trait locus mapping in mice", Gastroenterology 2003, 125(3), 868-881).
  • FXR as a good target for the development of small molecule agonists that can be used to prevent cholesterol gallstone formation or to prevent re- formation of gallstones after surgical removal or Shockwave lithotripsy (discussed in: S. Doggrell “New targets in and potential treatments for cholesterol gallstone disease” Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs 2006, 7(4), 344-348).
  • FXR binding compounds are thought to be good candidates for the treatment of Type Il Diabetes because of their insulin sensitization, glycogenogenic, and lipid lowering effects.
  • the compounds according to the invention and pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds are used in the treatment of Type Il Diabetes which can be overcome by FXR-mediated upregulation of systemic insulin sensitivity and intracellular insulin signalling in liver, increased peripheral glucose uptake and metabolisation, increased glycogen storage in liver, decreased output of glucose into serum from liver-borne gluconeogenesis.
  • said compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are used for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of chronic intrahepatic and some forms of extrahepatic cholestatic conditions, such as primary biliary cirrhosis (PBC), primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC), progressive familiar cholestasis (PFIC), alcohol-induced cirrhosis and associated cholestasis, or liver fibrosis resulting from chronic cholestatic conditions or acute intraheptic cholestatic conditions such as estrogen or drug induced cholestasis.
  • PBC primary biliary cirrhosis
  • PSC primary sclerosing cholangitis
  • PFIC progressive familiar cholestasis
  • alcohol-induced cirrhosis and associated cholestasis or liver fibrosis resulting from chronic cholestatic conditions or acute intraheptic cholestatic conditions such as estrogen or drug induced cholestasis.
  • the invention also relates to a compound of formula (I) or to a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for the treatment of gastrointestinal conditions with a reduced uptake of dietary fat and fat-soluble dietary vitamins which can be overcome by increased intestinal levels of bile acids and phospholipids.
  • said compound or pharmaceutical composition is used for treating a disease selected from the group consisting of lipid and lipoprotein disorders such as hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and atherosclerosis as a clinically manifest condition which can be ameliorated by FXR's beneficial effect on raising HDL cholesterol, lowering serum triglycerides, increasing conversion of liver cholesterol into bile acids and increased clearance and metabolic conversion of VLDL and other lipoproteins in the liver.
  • lipid and lipoprotein disorders such as hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and atherosclerosis
  • said compound and pharmaceutical composition are used for the preparation of a medicament where the combined lipid lowering, anti- cholestatic and anti-fibrotic effects of FXR-targeted medicaments can be exploited for the treatment of liver steatosis and associated syndromes such as non-alcoholic steatohepatitis ("NASH"), or for the treatment of cholestatic and fibrotic effects that are associated with alcohol-induced cirrhosis, or with viral-borne forms of hepatitis.
  • NASH non-alcoholic steatohepatitis
  • cholestatic and fibrotic effects that are associated with alcohol-induced cirrhosis, or with viral-borne forms of hepatitis.
  • loss of functional FXR leads to increased atherosclerosis in ApoE knockout mice (E. Hanniman et al.
  • the invention also relates to a compound according to formula (I) or a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for preventive and posttraumatic treatment of cardiovascular disorders such as acute myocardial infarction, acute stroke, or thrombosis which occur as an endpoint of chronic obstructive atherosclerosis.
  • cardiovascular disorders such as acute myocardial infarction, acute stroke, or thrombosis which occur as an endpoint of chronic obstructive atherosclerosis.
  • cardiovascular disorders such as acute myocardial infarction, acute stroke, or thrombosis which occur as an endpoint of chronic obstructive atherosclerosis.
  • the compounds according to formula (I) or pharmaceutical composition comprising said compounds are suitable for treating Non-malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as increased neointima formation after balloon vessel dilatation and stent application due to increased proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells (VSMCs) or Bening Prostate Hyperplasia (BPH), a pre-neoplastic form of hyperproliferation, other forms of scar tissue formation and fibrotisation which can be overcome by e.g.
  • Non-malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as increased neointima formation after balloon vessel dilatation and stent application due to increased proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells (VSMCs) or Bening Prostate Hyperplasia (BPH), a pre-neoplastic form of hyperproliferation, other forms of scar tissue formation and fibrotisation which can be overcome by e.g.
  • said compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are used for the treatment of malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as all forms of cancer (e.g. certain forms of breast or prostate cancer) where interference with PI-3- Kinase/AKT/mTOR signalling and / or induction of p27 k ⁇ p and / or induction of apoptosis will have a beneficial impact.
  • malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as all forms of cancer (e.g. certain forms of breast or prostate cancer) where interference with PI-3- Kinase/AKT/mTOR signalling and / or induction of p27 k ⁇ p and / or induction of apoptosis will have a beneficial impact.
  • FXR seems also to be involved in the control of antibacterial defense in the intestine (T. lnagaki et al. "Regulation of antibacterial defense in the small intestine by the nuclear bile acid receptor" Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U S A. 2006, 103(10), 3920- 3905) although an exact mechanism is not provided. From these published data, however, one can conclude that treatment with FXR agonists might have a beneficial impact in the therapy of Inflammatory Bowel Disorders (IBD), in particular those forms where the upper (ileal) part of the intestine is affected (e.g. ileal Crohn ' s disease) because this seems to be the site of action of FXR ' s control on bacterial growth.
  • IBD Inflammatory Bowel Disorders
  • the invention also relates to a compound according to formula (I) or a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for treating a disease related to Inflammatory Bowel Diseases such as Crohn ' s disease or Colitis ulcerosa.
  • FXR- mediated restoration of intestinal barrier function and reduction in non-commensal bacterial load is believed to be helpful in reducing the exposure of bacterial antigens to the intestinal immune system and can therefore reduce inflammatory responses.
  • the invention further relates to a compound or pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of obesity and associated disorders such as metabolic syndrome (combined conditions of dyslipidemias, diabetes and abnormally high body-mass index) which can be overcome by FXR-mediated lowering of serum triglycerides, blood glucose and increased insulin sensitivity and FXR-mediated weight loss.
  • said compound or pharmaceutical composition is for treating persistent infections by intracellular bacteria or parasitic protozoae such as Mycobacterium spec. (Treatment of Tuberculosis or Lepra), Listeria monocytogenes (Treatment of Listeriosis), Leishmania spec. (Leishmaniosis), Trypanosoma spec. (Chagas Disease; Trypanosomiasis; Sleeping Sickness).
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention are useful in the preparation of a medicament for treating clinical complications of Type I and Type Il Diabetes. Examples of such complications include Diabetic Nephropathy, Diabetic Retinopathy, Diabetic Neuropathies, Peripheral Arterial Occlusive Disease (PAOD). Other clinical complications of Diabetes are also encompassed by the present invention.
  • conditions and diseases which result from chronic fatty and fibrotic degeneration of organs due to enforced lipid and specifically triglyceride accumulation and subsequent activation of profibrotic pathways may also be treated by applying the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • Such conditions and diseases encompass Non-Alcoholic Steatohepatitis (NASH) and chronic cholestatic conditions in the liver, Glomerulosclerosis and Diabetic Nephropathy in the kidney, Macula Degeneration and Diabetic Retinopathy in the eye and Neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer ' s Disease in the brain or Diabetic Neuropathies in the peripheral nervous system.
  • NASH Non-Alcoholic Steatohepatitis
  • Chronic cholestatic conditions in the liver Glomerulosclerosis and Diabetic Nephropathy in the kidney
  • Macula Degeneration and Diabetic Retinopathy in the eye
  • Neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer ' s Disease in the brain or Diabetic Neuropathies in the peripheral nervous system.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be combined as the active ingredient in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • the carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration, e.g., oral or parenteral (including intravenous).
  • any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations, such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions; or carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparations.
  • oral liquid preparations such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions
  • carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparation
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. If desired, tablets may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1 percent of active compound. The percentage of active compound in these compositions may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 percent to about 60 percent of the weight of the unit. The amount of active compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage will be obtained.
  • the active compounds can also be administered intranasally as, for example, liquid drops or spray.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain a binder such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin.
  • a dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil.
  • a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil.
  • Various other materials may be present as coatings or to modify the physical form of the dosage unit. For instance, tablets may be coated with shellac, sugar or both.
  • a syrup or elixir may contain, in addition to the active ingredient, sucrose as a sweetening agent, methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and a flavoring such as cherry or orange flavor.
  • the compounds of the present invention may also be administered parenterally. Solutions or suspensions of these active compounds can be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant such as hydroxy-propylcellulose. Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols and mixtures thereof in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • Any suitable route of administration may be employed for providing a mammal, especially a human, with an effective dose of a compound of the present invention.
  • oral, rectal, topical, parenteral, ocular, pulmonary, nasal, and the like may be employed.
  • Dosage forms include tablets, troches, dispersions, suspensions, solutions, capsules, creams, ointments, aerosols, and the like.
  • compounds of the present invention are administered orally.
  • the effective dosage of active ingredient employed may vary depending on the particular compound employed, the mode of administration, the condition being treated and the severity of the condition being treated. Such dosage may be ascertained readily by a person skilled in the art.
  • the compounds of the present invention are administered at a daily dosage of from about 0.1 milligram to about 100 milligram per kilogram of animal body weight, preferably given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form.
  • the total daily dosage is from about 1.0 milligrams to about 1000 milligrams, preferably from about 1 milligram to about 50 milligrams.
  • the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 milligrams to about 350 milligrams. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.
  • ADME Absorption, distribution, metabolism, excretion
  • the compounds of the present invention can be prepared according to the procedures of the following Schemes and Examples, using appropriate materials and are further exemplified by the following specific examples. Moreover, by utilizing the procedures described herein, in conjunction with ordinary skills in the art, additional compounds of the present invention claimed herein can be readily prepared.
  • the compounds illustrated in the examples are not, however, to be construed as forming the only genus that is considered as the invention.
  • the examples further illustrate details for the preparation of the compounds of the present invention. Those skilled in the art will readily understand that known variations of the conditions and processes of the following preparative procedures can be used to prepare these compounds.
  • the instant compounds are generally isolated in the form of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, such as those described above.
  • the amine-free bases corresponding to the isolated salts can be generated by neutralization with a suitable base, such as aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, and extraction of the liberated amine-free base into an organic solvent, followed by evaporation.
  • a suitable base such as aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide
  • the amine-free base, isolated in this manner can be further converted into another pharmaceutically acceptable salt by dissolution in an organic solvent, followed by addition of the appropriate acid and subsequent evaporation, precipitation or crystallization.
  • the carboxylic free acids corresponding to the isolated salts can be generated by neutralization with a suitable acid, such as aqueous hydrochloric acid, sodium hydrogen sulfate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, and extraction of the liberated carboxylic-free acid into an organic solvent, followed by evaporation.
  • a suitable acid such as aqueous hydrochloric acid, sodium hydrogen sulfate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate
  • the carboxylic acid, isolated in this manner can be further converted into another pharmaceutically acceptable salt by dissolution in an organic solvent, followed by addition of the appropriate base and subsequent evaporation, precipitation or crystallization.
  • Suitable starting materials, building blocks and reagents employed in the synthesis as described below are commercially available from Sigma-Aldrich Chemie GmbH, Kunststoff, Germany, from Acros Organics, Belgium or from Fisher Scientific GmbH, 58239 Schense, Germany, for example, or can be routinely prepared by procedures described in the literature, for example in “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure", 5th Edition; John Wiley & Sons or Theophil Eicher, Siegfried Hauptmann "The Chemistry of Heterocycles; Structures, Reactions, Synthesis and Application", 2 nd edition, Wiley- VCH 2003; Fieser et al. "Fiesers ' Reagents for organic Synthesis” John Wiley & Sons 2000.
  • E L is halogen, OH, OC(O)alkyl, OC(O)aryl, O-aryl, O-pentafluorophenyl,
  • E N -H is a group acting as a nucleophile; such as OH, SH, NH 2 , N(R 14 )H, NH(CO)O-alkyl, NH(CO)O-aryl, NH(SO) 2 aryl, NH(SO) 2 alkyl, CH 3 or
  • L A is halogen, NH 2 , N(R 10 JH, nitro, azido, CN, CF 3 , COCI, COF, CHO,
  • L B is halogen, NH 2 , N(R 10 )H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH 2 OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH 2 , C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH, SO 2 CI, SO 3 H, G-NH 2 , G-N(R 10 JH, OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OH) 2 , B(OMe) 2 , BF 3 ' , 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-i ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
  • Lc is halogen, NH 2 , N(R 10 )H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH 2 OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH 2 , C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH, SO 2 CI, SO 3 H, G-NH 2 , G-N(R 10 )H, OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OMe) 2 , B(OH) 2 , BF 3 ' , 4 ,4,5,5-tetramethyM ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl.
  • R 10 , R 14 and G are as defined in the claims.
  • E L is halogen, OH, OSO 2 alkyl or OSO 2 aryl;
  • E N -H is OH, SH, NH 2 , Or CH 3 ;
  • L A is halogen, nitro, azido, CN, CF 3 , C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O- hetaryl, SH, SMe, SO 3 H, G-NH 2 , G-N(R 10 )H, OH, O-alkyl, G-SH, G- OH, G-halogen, B(OH) 2 , B(OMe) 2 , BF 3 " , 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-i ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
  • L B is NH 2 , COCI, COOH, C(O)NHNH 2 , SO 2 CI, B(OMe) 2 , B(OH) 2 , BF 3 " , 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
  • Lc is NH 2 , CHO, COCI, COOH, C(O)NHNH 2 , SO 2 CI, B(OH) 2 , B(OMe) 2 , BF 3 " , 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
  • E L is chlorine or OH
  • E N -H is OH or NH 2 ;
  • L A is halogen, nitro, CN, C(O)O-alkyl, SH, SO 3 H, B(OMe) 2 , B(OH) 2 , BF 3 " or 4,4,5,5-tetramethyM ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl;
  • L 8 is NH 2 , COCI, COOH or SO 2 CI;
  • L 0 is NH 2 , CHO, COCI, COOH or SO 2 CI.
  • Pyrazole compounds of general formula IVa are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, are readily synthesized by Standard procedures commonly employed in the art as illustrated in Scheme 1.
  • pyrazole compounds of general formula IVa may be prepared by combining an acetylene compound of general formula Villa with a hydrazone of general formula Ma in acetic acid and in the presence of air to get f-butylatet pyrazole compound of general fomula IHa. Subsequent de-butylation finally leads to a compound of general formula IVa as described in the literature (Kamitori et al., Heterocycles 1994, 38, 21- 25; Kamitori et al. J. Heterocycl.
  • Another method for preparing compounds of formula IVa involves treating an aldehyde of formula Va with trichloroacetylhydrazine to get trichloroacetylhydrazone Via which is subsequently combined with 1 ,3 diketone compounds of general formula Vila to give products of general formula IVa, as exemplified in the literature (Kaim et al., Synlett 2000, 353- 355).
  • the variants R 1 to R 3 , a and b are as defined in the claims.
  • the variant E comprises the variants E N -H and E L having the meaning defined above.
  • Isoxazole compounds of the general formula IVb are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, are readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art (Scheme 2), for example by combining acetylene compound of general formula Villa with an alpha-chlorooxime compound of formula Mb as described by Quilio et al., Gazz. Chim. Ital. 1937, 67, 589.
  • compounds IVb are accessible by reacting alpha- chlorooxime of formula lib with 1 ,3-dicarbonyl compound Vb as described, for example, by Maloney et al., J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(16), 2971-2974 and by Doley et al, J. Chem. Soc. 1963, 5838-5845.
  • Another method for preparing compounds of formula IVb is especially suitable if R 3 is alkylamino and involves combining an acetylene compound of formula Villa with nitrile oxides of general formula VIb as exemplified by Himbert et al., Liebigs Ann. Chem, 1990, 4, 403-407 and in Beyer et al., Justus Liebigs Ann Chem 1970, 45-54.
  • variants of compounds of formula IVa-IVe may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula IVa-IVe by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in the literature, for example in: T. Eicher, S. Hauptmann “The Chemistry of Heterocycles; Structures, Reactions, Synthesis and Application", 2 nd edition, Wiley-VCH 2003 (hereafter referred to as Eicher); "March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure", 5th Edition; John Wiley & Sons (hereafter referred to as March); Larock “Comprehensive Organic Transformations", VCH Publishers, New York, N.Y. 1989 (hereafter referred to as Larock); Fieser et al. "Fiesers ' Reagents for organic Synthesis” John Wiley & Sons 2000 (hereafter referred to as Fieser).
  • a typical synthesis for the compounds of general formula (I) involves a multistep synthesis sequence as depicted in Scheme 4 and in Scheme 5.
  • two synthetic routes are envisaged for the first step resulting in an intermediate of general formula XII.
  • a suitable compound of general formula IXa equipped with an nucleophilic group chosen from E N -H, is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited to sodium methoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium carbonate, sodium hexamethyldisilazane, lithium diisopropylamide, n-butyllithium or an amine base such as diisopropylethylamine, followed by the addition of a compound of general formula IVa-IVe, equipped with a suitable leaving group E L .
  • a suitable solvent preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited
  • a base is typically employed in a one to one ratio. However, as the skilled artisan would appreciate, a molar excess, usually in about 1-3 fold molar excess is acceptable.
  • the reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 0 0 C to about 100 0 C, preferably at room temperature and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours.
  • E L is a poor leaving group (OH for example)
  • it needs to be activated by adding activating reagents to the reaction mixture such as MeSO 2 CI, CF 3 (SO 2 J 2 O or Mitsunobu reagents diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine, for example, as shown in example 1.
  • activating reagents such as MeSO 2 CI, CF 3 (SO 2 J 2 O or Mitsunobu reagents diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine, for example, as shown in example 1.
  • the leaving group E L is chlorine or OH.
  • the nucleophilic group E N -H in compounds of general formula IXa is OH.
  • E N -H is OH and E L is chlorine
  • the reactants of general formula IXa are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, DMF or methanol and typically 1-2 equivalent of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride or sodium methanolate are added.
  • a compound of general formula IVa-IVe is added and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours.
  • Reaction temperatures may range from -10 0 C to +60 0 C, typically from -10 0 C to +10 0 C.
  • the reactants of general formula IVa-IVe and IXa are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably benzene or toluene, and 1 to 2 equivalents triphenylphosphine and diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) are added without addition of a base.
  • a suitable solvent preferably benzene or toluene
  • triphenylphosphine and diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) are added without addition of a base.
  • the reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 0 0 C to about 50 0 C, preferably at room temperature.
  • the reaction times are typically 1h to 12h.
  • the solvents are usually removed by distillation at temperatures typically ranging from 10 to 5O 0 C.
  • the crude product is optionally purified by column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
  • step A2 a suitable compound of general formula IXb, equipped with a suitable leaving group E L , is combined with a compound of general formula IVa-IVe, equipped with an nucleophilic group chosen from E N -H under similar conditions as applied in step A1.
  • step A2 the leaving group E L in compound of general formula IXb is chlorine and the nucleophilic group E N -H in compounds of general formula IVa-IVe is OH or NH 2 .
  • the reactants of general formula IVa-IVe are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, DMF or methanol and typically 1-2 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride or sodium methanolate are added.
  • a compound of general formula IXb is added and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for about 1h to 12h. Reaction temperatures may range from -10 0 C to +60 0 C, typically from -10°C to +1O 0 C.
  • step A1 and step A2 may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene
  • step B the variants of compounds of formula XII may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula XIV by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in
  • step B L A is a nitro group, which is reduced into an amino group L 8 .
  • L A is a nitro group, which is converted into a bromine by reduction, subsequent diazotation and subsequent substitution by a bromide.
  • L A is a SH group, which is interconverted by oxidation into a SO 3 H group and treated with POCI 3 to yielding a
  • L A is an COOalkyl ester group, which is saponified into a COOH group L 8 .
  • step B may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene.
  • a suitable compound of general formula XIII bearing a functional group L 0 is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited to sodium methoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium carbonate, sodium hexamethyldisilazane, lithium diisopropylamide, n-butyllithium or an amine base such as diisopropylethylamine, triethylamine or N-methylmorpholine.
  • a suitable solvent preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited to sodium methoxide, potassium
  • a compound of general formula XIV, equipped with a functional group L B is added. It is contemplated that variants of compounds of general formula XIII and variants of compounds of general formula XIV are selected in a way that the synthetic combination of functional group Lc with functional group L B results in a moiety L as defined in the description above. If a base is required, it is typically employed in a one to one ratio. However, as the skilled artisan would appreciate, a molar excess, usually in about 1-3 fold molar excess is acceptable.
  • the reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 0 0 C to about 100 0 C, preferably at room temperature and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours.
  • L B and L c are groups of low reactivity that do not combine under the conditions described above, the use of an activating agent may be necessary.
  • L B is COOH and L A is NH 2 or vice versa and coupling agents such as PyBOP; EDC or DCC might be required to ease the reaction.
  • the COOH group might be converted into an activated COCI group as described in Larock.
  • a catalyst such as CuSO ⁇ ascorbic acid might be required as described in K. B. Sharpless et al., Angew. Chem. 2002, 114, 2708-2711.
  • a Pd catalyst such as PdCI 2 (PPh 3 J 2 is required as described in A. Suzuki “palladium- Catalyzed Cross-Coupling Reactions of Organoboron Compounds” Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-2483.
  • step C may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene.
  • the variants of compounds of general formula I may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of general formula I by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in Greene, Eicher and Larock. Specific examples of such functional group interconversions can be found in the examples section.
  • the variants of compounds of formula I may be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula I by using general methods for single- or multistep functional group interconversions as described in Larock.
  • the skilled artisan will appreciate, that the synthesis steps described above may be optionally carried out in an alternative synthesis sequence, i.e. a compound of general formula XIII may be combined with a compound of general formula IX by the techniques mentioned above and the resulting intermediate is subsequently combined with a compound of general formula IVa-IVe to give products of general formula (I).
  • a reversed order of synthetic steps is exemplified in example 19 in the examples section.
  • the particular order of steps required to produce the compounds of formula I is dependent upon the particular compound being synthesized, the starting compound, and the relative lability of the substituted moieties.
  • Lc is COCI or SO 2 CI
  • Y is Y 1 , Y 3 or Y 5 ;
  • L is -C(O)N(R 10 )-, -S(OLN(R 10 )-, -G-N(R 10 )-;
  • G is -CH 2 -;
  • Z is phenyl-A-R 9 or pyridyl-A-R 9 ;
  • A is a bond or -CH 2 -;
  • R 9 is COOH or COOMe.
  • a suitable compound of general formula (IVb) is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, methanol, benzene or toluene.
  • a suitable solvent preferably tetrahydrofurane, methanol, benzene or toluene.
  • EL is chlorine
  • a base is added, for example sodium hydride or sodium methanolate or the like.
  • E L is OH
  • triphenylphosphine and diethyldiazenedicarboxylate (DEAD) are added instead of a base.
  • a compound of general formula IXa is added and the reactants are typically combined at a temperature ranging from about 0 0 C to about 50 0 C, preferably at room temperature. The reaction times are typically 1 to 24h.
  • the solvents are usually removed by distillation at temperatures typically ranging from 10 0 C to 50 0 C.
  • the crude product of general formula XII is optionally pur
  • step B of most preferred embodiments of the invention a nitro group in a compound of general formula XII is reduced to give an amino group being part of a compound of general formula XIV.
  • reduction methods are suitable as described in Larock, for instance hydrogenation in presence of a hydrogenation catalyst such as palladium on charcoal or the like, or reduction using sodium borohydride in methanol and nickel chloride as catalyst.
  • a reduction using zinc may be carried out as follows: a suitable compound of general formula XII is dissolved or suspended together with zinc powder in a suitable solvent, preferably an alcohol such as methanol and an acid, preferably acetic acid is added.
  • the reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 0 0 C to about 50 0 C, preferably at room temperature, until sufficient conversion is detected by methods known in the art, such as TLC or HPLC.
  • the reaction times typically range from 1 to 24h.
  • solid byproducts may then be removed by filtration.
  • Volatiles are removed by methods known in the art, such as distillation, for example.
  • the crude product of general formula XIV is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
  • step C of most preferred embodiments of the invention the amino group in the compound of general formula XIV is combined with a sulfonic acid or carboxylic acid moiety or the corresponding sulfonyl chloride or carboxylic acid chloride moiety in compounds of general formula XIII.
  • a sulfonic acid or carboxylic acid moiety or the corresponding sulfonyl chloride or carboxylic acid chloride moiety in compounds of general formula XIII is combined with a sulfonic acid or carboxylic acid moiety or the corresponding sulfonyl chloride or carboxylic acid chloride moiety in compounds of general formula XIII.
  • Several methods are suitable for this transformation as described in Larock, including activating a carboxylic acid group of compound of formula XIII using DCC, EDC, PyBroP or another suitable coupling agent known in the art and combining the activated acid with the amine function of compound of general formula XIV.
  • compounds of general structure I may further be converted into other variants of the same general structure by single or multistep functional group interconversions such as described in Larock.
  • an amide or sulfonamide group L is N-alkylated by an alkyl halogen, preferably methyl iodide.
  • an alkyl halogen preferably methyl iodide.
  • the compound of generally formula I is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, for example THF at a temperature ranging from -10 to + 30 0 C, typically at 0 0 C and a base, typically NaH is added and the mixture is optionally agitated until deprotonation has progressed sufficiently.
  • An alkyl halogen is added and agitation is continued at a temperature ranging from -10 0 C to +80 0 C, typically room temperature until conversion into the alkylation product is sufficient.
  • the volatiles are removed by methods known in the art and the crude product is optionally further purified by the generally accepted methods, such as extraction and/or chromatography.
  • a carboxylic ester group in compound of formula I is saponified to give the corresponding carboxylic acid of formula I.
  • compound of formula I is dissolved in an suitable solvent, such as an alcohol or an ether, preferably methanol, optionally containing 0-50% of water, together with 1 to 10 equivalents, preferably 1 to 2 equivalents of a base, preferably NaOH or LiOH.
  • the reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 0 0 C to about 80 0 C, preferably from room temperature to 60 0 C, until sufficient conversion is detected by methods known in the art, such as TLC or HPLC.
  • the reaction times typically range from 1 to 24h.
  • the crude product of general formula I is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
  • Detection diode array (PDA), 190-800 nm; masspec (APCI + or -).
  • 1 H-NMR 400 MHz spectra were recorded on a Varian MERCURY plus 400 MHz spectrometer,
  • Step 2 The product derived from step 1 (0.796 g, 4.7 mmol) was added to a of solution HBr (33%) in acetic acid (5 ml), the mixture was stirred at 60 0 C for 2 h and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in diethyl ether (5 ml), washed with 5% aqueous ammonia (3 ml) and water (3 ml) and the organic phase was evaporated to give 0.63 g (87%) of 6-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol as colourless powder. Step 3
  • Zinc powder (0.156 g, 2.4 mmol) was added to a vigorously stirred suspension of the product derived from step 3 (0.100 g, 0.240 mmol) in methanol (4 ml), followed by the dropwise addition of acetic acid (0.065 g, 1.1 mmol).
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature and passed through a 2 cm layer of silica which was subsequently rinsed with methanol. The eluent was evaporated and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml) and filtered.
  • Step 2 4- ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl ⁇ -benzoic acid methyl ester (0.059 g, 0.10 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml) followed by the addition of NaOH (0.076 g, 1.9 mmol) and water (0.15 ml) and the mixture was stirred at 50 0 C for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in water (1.0 ml) and acidified to pH 6 with acetic acid.
  • step 1 4- ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl ⁇ -benzoic acid methyl ester from example 3 step 1 (0.096 g, 0.16 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (3 ml) at 0 0 C, NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.008 g, 0.192 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 1 h at 0 0 C. Methyl iodide (0.030 g, 0.192 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 17 h.
  • 6-methoxy-2-trifluoromethyl-3-nitro-pyridine (0.50 g, 2.3 mmol) was added to a solution of HBr in acetic acid (33% HBr w/w, 5 ml) and the mixture was to stirred at 80 0 C for 16 h.
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes : ethyl acetate 10:1 ) to give 0.396 g (83%) of 6-trifluoromethyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol as yellowish oil.
  • Step 3 6-Trifluoromethyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol (0.396 g, 1.9 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.653 g, 2.3 mmol), triphenylphosphine (0.898 g, 3.4 mmol) and benzene (15 ml) were placed in an reaction vessel followed by the dropwise addition of diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (0.74 g, 3.7 mmol).
  • Zinc powder (0.21 g, 3.1 mmol) was added to a vigorously stirred suspension of 6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-3-nitro- pyridine (0.150 g, 0.310 mmol) in methanol (4ml), followed by the dropwise addition of acetic acid (0.084 g, 1.4 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 2 h at 50 0 C and filtered through a 2 cm layer of silica (eluent methanol). The eluent was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml).
  • Step 5 6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin- 3-ylamine from step 4 (0.125 g, 0.280 mmol) was dissolved in CH 2 CI 2 (5 ml) followed by the addition of triethylamine (0.085 g, 0.84 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.139 g, 0.70 mmol).
  • step 4 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin- 3-ylamine from example 5, step 4 (0.132 g, 0.30 mmol) was dissolved in dry acetonitrile (5 ml) followed by the addition of 4-chlorosulfonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.070 g, 0.33 mmol) and pyridine (0.071 g, 0.90 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 12 h at 50 0 C, N-methylmorpholine (0.03 g, 0.3 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 8 h.
  • reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250*20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile:water (2:1) — pure acetonitrile) followed by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1) to give 0.060 g (31%) of 4- ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl ⁇ -benzoic acid methyl ester as colourless oil.
  • step 1 (0.035 g, 0.050 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (3 ml) at 0 0 C (ice bath), NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.0026 g, 0.065 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0 0 C. Methyl iodide (0.028 g, 0.20 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 20 h.
  • Step i 2,6-Dichloro-3-nitro-pyridine (2.0 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF (10 ml) at 0 0 C followed by the addition of methanol (0.30 g, 9.0 mmol) and NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.40 g, 10 mmol) in portions. The mixture was stirred for 1h and poured on ice (50 g). The precipitating yellow crystals of 6-chloro-2-methoxy-3-nitro-pyridine were filtered and dried on air. Yield: 1.8 g (92%).
  • Step 2 ⁇ -Chloro ⁇ -methoxy-S-nitro-pyridine (0.30 g, 1.0 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (5 ml) at O 0 C, NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.050 g, 1.2 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at this temperature for 1h, followed by the addition of [3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.20 g, 1.0 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure, water (10 ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2 ⁇ 10 ml).
  • step 2 The product synthesised in step 2 (0.23 g, 0.50 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml), zinc powder (0.32 g, 5.0 mmol) was added followed by acetic acid (0.12 g, 2.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at 50°C. The mixture was filtered, washed with methanol (2*10 ml) and the combined filtrates were evaporated. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 CI 2 (20 ml), washed with 10% aqueous K 2 CO 3 (10 ml) and water (10 ml), dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and filtered.
  • Step 5 The product derived from step 4 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 5O 0 C for 2 h.
  • step 4 (0.070 g, 0.12 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (5 ml) and cooled to O 0 C. NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.006 g, 0.15 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30min. Methyl iodide (0.021 g, 0.15 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperature for 12 h.
  • step 1 The product derived from step 1 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with water (0.2 ml) and NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 50 0 C for 2 h. The volatiles were evaporated, dissolved in water (10 ml) and neutralized with acidic acid. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried to give the title compound. Yield: 0.025 g (85%).
  • Step 2 The product of step 1 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 0 C for 2 h. The solvent was revaporated, dissolved in water (10 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH 6, leading to the formation of a precipitate which was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried yielding the title compound. Yield: 0.023 g (77%).
  • step 1 (4- ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl ⁇ -benzoic acid methyl ester, 0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in anhydrous THF (3 ml) was cooled to O 0 C, NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.0024 g, 0.06 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0 0 C. Methyl iodide (0.009 g, 0.06 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperature for 12 h.
  • stepi The product derived from stepi (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and heated at 50 0 C for 2 h. The solvent was evaporated, redissolved in water (10 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH6. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give the title compound. Yield: 0.025 g (83%).
  • step 1 The product of step 1 (0.13 g, 0.77 mmol) was dissolved in a 0 0 C solution of HBr in acetic acid (33% w/w, 5 ml) and then stirred at 60 0 C for 2 h, cooled to room temperature and poured into diethyl ether (10 ml). The crystalline precipitate that was filtered, washed with ether and dried, gave ⁇ .155 g (86%) of 4-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2- ol.
  • Step 3 The product derived from step 2 (0.15 g, 1.0 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.28 g, 1.0 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.29 g, 1.1 mmol) in benzene (10 ml) were treated dropwise with diisopropyl- diazenedicarboxylate (0.024 g, 1.2 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h.
  • step 3 The product derived from step 3 (0.15 g, 0.35 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) was treated with zinc powder (0.23 g, 3.5 mmol) and acetic acid (0.10 g, 1.7 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 30 min. The solids were filtered and washed with methanol (2*10 ml) and the filtrate was evaporated.
  • Step 5 The product derived from step 4 (0.150 g, 0.380 mmol) was dissolved in CH 2 CI 2 (5 ml), diisopropylethylamine (0.073 g, 0.57 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.090 g, 0.45 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 6 h at room temperature.
  • Example 15 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 1 using the appropriate starting materials.
  • Example 16 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 1 using the appropriate starting materials.
  • Example 17 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 3 using the appropriate starting materials.
  • Example 18 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 3 using the appropriate starting materials.
  • the stirred mixture was allowed to warm to 20 0 C and transferred in portions of 3-5 ml into a second flask which was heated to 35-40 °C (the temperature was not allowed to rise over 4O 0 C - monitoring carefully the temperature after every addition of a new portion).
  • step 1 The product of step 1 (0.96 g, 6.27 mmol), 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (2.49 g, 12.5 mmol) and triethylamine (1.27 g, 12.5 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous dichloromethane (20 ml) and the mixture was stirred for 96 h at room temperature.
  • step 2 The product derived from step 2 (0.5 g, 2.1 mmol) was dissolved in dry methanol (20 ml) and hydrogenated at 4 bar H 2 pressure and Raney nickel as catalyst (5% w/w). The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica using chloroform- methanol (40:1) as eluent to give 0.189 g (20%) of N-(5-amino-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl)- terephthalamic acid methyl ester.
  • the title compound was synthesized from the product of step 4 of example 5 (6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3- ylamine) by coupling with 3-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester according to the procedure for step 5 of example 5 and subsequent N-methylation and ester hydrolysis following the procedure described for example 7.
  • reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml), evaporated and redissolved in dioxane (3 ml). This solution was added to a saturated solution of ammonia in dioxane (3 ml) at 0 0 C and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1 h and at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue was triturated with hexanes and filtered.
  • reaction mixture was evaporated, redissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml), again evaporated and redissolved in dioxane (3 ml). This solution was chilled at 0 0 C and then added to a 0 0 C 20% solution of dimethylamine in tetrahydrofurane (3 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C for 1 h and at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated and the crude material was purified by preparative TLC on silica to give the title compound as white powder. Yield: 0.036 g (69%).
  • a 60% suspension of sodium hydride in mineral oil (0.025 g, 0.50 mmol) was added to the product of step 1 (0.17 g, 0.29 mmol) in dry THF (10 ml) under argon and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes.
  • a solution of iodomethane (0.085 g, 0.60 mmol) in dry THF (1 ml) was added dropwise and the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with water (5 ml), extracted with dichloromethane (3x10 ml), dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated.
  • Step 2 The product derived from step 1 (0.026 g, 0.044 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml) and a solution of sodium hydroxide (0.018 g, 0.44 mmol) in water (0.2 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was treated with water (1 ml). The resulting solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6.
  • step 1 4-( ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamino ⁇ -methyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester, (0.076 g, 0.128 mmol) was dissolved in 1 ,2-dichloroethane (5 ml) and paraformaldehyde (0.023 g, 0.77 mmol), acetic acid (0.046 g, 0.77 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.163 g, 0.77 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h.
  • Step 2 A suspension of the product derived from step 1 (0.046 g, 0.076 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) was treated with sodium hydroxide (0.03 g, 0.76 mmol) and water (0.3 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was diluted with water (1 ml). The resulting solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6 and the formed precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3x5 ml) and dried on air to obtain the title product as a white powder. Yield: 0.030 g (66%).
  • Step 5 The product derived from the previous step (0.050 g, 0.082 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (5 ml) and a 60% suspension of sodium hydride in mineral oil (0.005 g, 0.123 mmol) was added at 0 0 C for 15 min. lodomethane (0.018 g, 0.123 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1 h and for another 11 h at room temperature. Sodium hydroxide (0.062 g, 1.6 mmol) and water (0.5 ml) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 0 C for 16 h and evaporated.
  • Step 2 A suspension of sodium hydride (60%) (230 mg, 5.74 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) in DMF (5 ml) was cooled to 0 0 C, and a solution of the amine product from step 1 (1.54 g, 4.79 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added dropwise. The dark-brown mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 40 min, and methyl iodide (0.42 ml, 6.70 mmol, 1.4 equiv.) was dropwise added at 0 0 C. The mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1 h and at room temperature for 45 min and was then poured into a mixture of brine, water and EtOAc (80 ml each).
  • step 2 To a suspension of the compound synthesised in step 2 (572 mg, 1.70 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) and water (4 ml) was added sodium dithionite (1.48 g, 8.52 mmol, 5 equiv.), and the mixture was stirred at 90 0 C for 50 min. After cooling to room temperature, the methanol was evaporated, and the residue was taken up with Vz- saturated NaCI solution (50 ml) and EtOAc (40 ml). The phases were separated, the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3*50 ml), and the combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), and concentrated.
  • Step 5 lodopyridine synthesized in the previous step (46 mg, 0.11 mmol, 1 equiv.), (3-(2,6- dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methanol (158 mg, 0.55 mmol, 5 equiv.) as described in step 3 of example 1 , copper(l)-iodide (8.4 mg, 0.044 mmol, 0.4 equiv.), 1 ,10-phenanthroline (16 mg, 0.088 mmol, 0.8 equiv.) and Cs 2 CO 3 (72 mg, 0.22 mmol, 2 equiv.) were placed in a screw-cap tube under argon, suspended in anhydrous toluene (0.5 ml), the mixture was flushed with argon, and the screw-cap was closed.
  • the coupling product synthesized in the previous step (65 mg, 0.078 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of THF (2.1 ml), methanol (0.7 ml) and water (0.7 ml), and LiOH H 2 O (33 mg, 0.78 mmol, 10 equiv.) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5.5 h. THF and methanol were removed under reduced pressure, the remaining solution was diluted with water (0.5 ml), cooled to 0 0 C, and 1N HCI was dropwise added until pH 5 was reached (approx. 0.72 ml). The solids were dissolved with EtOAc, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with small amounts of EtOAc.
  • Step i Following the procedure for step 1 of example 31 , 1.41 g (7.31 mmol) 2,3-dichloro-5- nitro-pyridine and methyl 3-(aminomethyl)-benzoate hydrochloride (1.77 g, 8.78 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) were reacted with 3.0 ml (17.6 mmol, 2.4 equiv.) of DIPEA in 2-propanol (15 ml) at 60 0 C for 1.5 h.
  • step 3 of example 31 The procedure described in step 3 of example 31 was applied. Methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5- nitropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from the previous step (2.25 g, 6.71 mmol) was reacted with sodium dithionite (3.51 g, 20.1 mmol, 3 equiv.) in a mixture of methanol (80 ml) and water (16 ml) (5:1 ) at 90 0 C for 1 h.
  • step 4 of example 31 399 mg (1.31 mmol) of methyl 3-(((5-amino-3-chloropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from step 3 of example 32, and 3.5 ml (26.1 mmol, 20 equiv.) of isoamylnitrite in diiodomethane (7 ml) were reacted for 40 min at room temperature. Hydroiodic acid (25 ⁇ l) was added at 0 0 C, and after the gas evolution had ceased, the mixture was stirred for additional 2 h at room temperature.
  • a suspension of methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5-iodopyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from step 4 (233 mg, 0.56 mmol, 1 equiv.), (3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methanol (561 mg, 1.96 mmol, 3.5 equiv.), copper(l)-iodide (43 mg, 0.22 mmol, 0.4 equiv.), 1 ,10-phenanthroline (81 mg, 0.45 mmol, 0.8 equiv.) and Cs 2 CO 3 (365 mg, 1.12 mmol, 2 equiv.) in anhydrous toluene (1 ml) under argon was heated at 120 0 C for 14.5h.
  • TBTU (0.177 g, 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 g, 0.55 mmol) were added to a solution of 4-[( ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl ⁇ -methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic (example 28) (0.20 g, 0.34 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml).
  • TBTU (0.177 g, 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 g, 0.55 mmol) were added under stirring to a solution of 4-[( ⁇ 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl methoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl ⁇ -methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic acid (example 28) (0.20 g, 0.34 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml) and stirred for 1 h at room temperature.
  • Trifluoroacetic acid (0.03 ml) was added to a solution of the product synthesised in step 1 (0.112 g, 0.16 mmol) in a 4:1 mixture THF-water (0.742 ml) at 0 0 C and the reaction mixture was stirred for 8 h at room temperature, neutralized with 25% aqueous ammonia and evaporated. The residue was diluted with water, extracted with dichloromethane, the extract was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to obtain the title compound in 0.076 g (71%) yield as a colorless oil.
  • N 1 ,N 1 -dimethyl-ethane-1 ,2- diamine (0.018 g, 0.20 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 12 h.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with water (6 ml), acetonitrile was removed in vacuo, the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate, the extract was washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated.
  • the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound in 0.035 g (31%) yield as a colorless oil.
  • FXR Farnesoid X Receptor
  • the amino acid boundaries of the ligand binding domain were amino acids 187-472 of Database entry NM_005123 (RefSeq).
  • Glutathione 4B sepharose beads were pelleted by centrifugation (2000 g, 15 sec, 4°C) and washed twice in wash buffer (25 mM Tris, 5OmM KCI, 4 mM MgCI 2 and 1 M NaCI). The pellet was resuspended in 3 ml elution buffer per liter of original culture (elution buffer: 20 mM Tris, 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI 2 and 80 mM glutathione added immediately prior to use as powder). The suspension was left rotating for 15 min at 4°C, the beads pelleted and eluted again with half the volume of elution buffer than the first time.
  • the eluates were pooled and dialysed overnight in 20 mM Hepes buffer (pH 7.5) containing 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI 2 as well as 1 mM dithiothreitol and 10% (v/v) glycerol.
  • the protein was analysed by SDS- Page.
  • the method measures the ability of putative ligands to modulate the interaction between the purified bacterial expressed FXR ligand binding domain (LBD) and a synthetic biotinylated peptide based on residues 676-700 of SRC-1 (LCD2, 676-700).
  • the sequence of the peptide used was B-CPSSHSSLTERHKILHRLLQEGSPS-COOH where the N-terminus was biotinylated (B).
  • the ligand binding domain (LBD) of FXR was expressed as fusion protein with GST in BL-21 cells using the vector pDEST15. Cells were lysed by sonication, and the fusion proteins purified over glutathione sepharose (Pharmacia) according to the manufacturers instructions.
  • the Perkin Elmer LANCE technology was applied. This method relies on the binding dependent energy transfer from a donor to an acceptor fluorophor attached to the binding partner of interest.
  • This method relies on the binding dependent energy transfer from a donor to an acceptor fluorophor attached to the binding partner of interest.
  • For ease of handling and reduction of background from compound fluorescence LANCE technology makes use of generic fluorophore labels and time resolved detection Assays were done in a final volume of 2 5 ⁇ l in a 384 well plate, in a Tris-based buffer (20 mM Tris-HCI pH 7,5; 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI 2 ; 35 ng/ ⁇ l BSA), containing 20-60 ng/well recombinantly expressed FXR-LBD fused to GST, 200-600 nM N-terminally biotinylated peptide, representing SRC1 aminoacids 676-700, 200 ng/well Streptavidin-xlAPC conjugate(Prozyme
  • DMSO content of the samples was kept at 1%.
  • the assay was equilibrated for one hour in the dark at room temperature in FIA-plates black 384 well (Greiner).
  • the LANCE signal was detected by a Perkin Elmer VICTOR2VTM Multilabel Counter The results were visualized by plotting the ratio between the emitted light at 665 nm and 615 nm. A basal level of FXR-peptide formation is observed in the absence of added ligand. Ligands that promote the complex formation induce a concentration-dependent increase in time-resolved fluorescent signal.
  • Aqueous solubility of compounds was determined by nephelometry or by the shake- flask method as follows:
  • Protocol A nephelometry method
  • Solubility of compounds was measured in PBS (pH 7.4), 5% DMSO at 23°C.
  • Nepheloskan Ascent Thermo Electron Corporation nephelometer was used for measurement of light scattering. Tested compounds were dissolved in DMSO to 10 mM. Prior to measurement the compounds were further diluted with PBS in the wells to final compound concentrations of 100, 70, 50, 35, 25, 17, 12 and ⁇ 10 ⁇ g/ml. The plates were incubated at room temperature for 24 hours to reach equilibrium and the scattered light was measured. Assay validation: Aqueous solubility of acetylsalicylic acid was determined to validate the assay. It was found to be >100 ⁇ g/ml at the day of experiment, which corresponds to the reported literature value of at least 2,17 mg/ml (The Merck index, 10th edition).
  • Sample preparation Sample and standard solution preparation is performed by mixing equal volumes of acetonitrile containing the internal standard (1 ⁇ M final concentration) with sample and calibration standard solutions (100 ⁇ l). After vigorously shaking (10 seconds) the samples are centrifuged (600Og) for 5 minutes at 20 0 C. Aliquots of the particle-free supernatants are transferred to 200 ⁇ l sample vials and subsequently subjected to LC-MS/MS. Assay procedure: Test concentration was 100 ⁇ M in 10 mM PBS buffer pH 7.4 with a final MeOH concentration of 1%. The volume of the incubation solution was 500 ⁇ l. Depending on each compound's solubility in MeOH, the stock concentration and the incubation concentration was adapted.
  • test solutions in quadruplicates were shaken at 300 rpm over a 20 hours period at room temperature, followed by centrifugation at 2000Og for 30 minutes to separate the solid phase.
  • 100 ⁇ l of particle free sample are added to 100 ⁇ l acetonitrile containing the internal starndard.
  • the aqueous solubility of the compounds was determined by measuring the concentration of the PBS buffer supernatant by HPLC-MS/MS. Aqueous solubilities of examples and reference compounds are listed in Table 3 below.
  • Caco-2 cells are widely used as an in vitro model for predicting human drug absorption.
  • the Caco-2 cell line is derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, and when cultured, the cells spontaneously differentiate into monolayers of polarised enterocytes.
  • the cells are seeded on TranswellTM plates and form a confluent monolayer over 20 days prior to the experiment.
  • the test compound is added to the apical side of the membrane and the transport of the compound across the monolayer is monitored over a 2 hour time period.
  • the permeability coefficient (Papp) is calculated from the following equation:
  • Equilibrium dialysis is used to determine the extent of binding of a compound to plasma proteins.
  • PC Test compound concentration in protein-containing compartment.
  • PF Test compound concentration in protein-free compartment.
  • the plasma protein binding assay can be performed using two other ratios of plasma (10% or 50% plasma in buffer v/v).
  • fuioo% fuio%/(10-9fUio%)
  • fuioo% fu 5 o%/(2-fu 5 o%).
  • Human liver microsomal suspension (1 ml) prepared in reaction buffer at a concentration of 0.5 mg microsomal protein/ml was preincubated for 3 min at 37°C with a NADPH-generating system (10 mM glucose 6-phosphate, 1 mM NADP+, and 1 unit/ml yeast glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase). The final compounds concentration is 10 ⁇ M.
  • Boiled microsomes (5 min) served as a control. Samples (50 ⁇ l) were then taken after 0, 5, 15, 30, 45, 120 min, into 200 ⁇ l acetonitrile, centrifuged for 15 min at 8000 x g to remove the protein pellet. Samples were analyzed for parent compound by HPLC.
  • Compound stability towards rat liver microsomes was determined as follows: The microsomes are incubated with the test compound at 37°C in the presence of the co- factor, NADPH, which initiates the reaction. The reaction is terminated by the addition of methanol. Following centrifugation, the supernatant is analysed on the LC-MS/MS. The disappearance of test compound is monitored over a 45 minute time period. The In peak area ratio (compound peak area/ internal standard peak area) is plotted against time and the gradient of the line determined.
  • Mouse microsomal stability assay In vitro assays were performed to evaluate the metabolic stability of test items in liver microsomes originating from mouse. Preparation of working standards of test items: Working solutions were prepared for each calibration level by appropriate dilution of the corresponding stock solution, depending on each compound's solubility in acetonitrile or acetonitrile/water. Calibration standards were prepared by spiking 196 ⁇ l standard matrix with 4 ⁇ l of the corresponding working solution. The standard matrix consists of 0.15 mg/ml of microsomal protein in phosphate buffer (100 mM pH 7.4), the final standard solutions contain 2% acetonitrile.
  • the samples and standard solutions were extracted with ethyl acetate, isolation of the compounds was performed by addition of 600 ⁇ l ethyl acetate containing the internal standard (0.1 ⁇ M) to 200 ⁇ l sample and calibration standard. After vigorously shaking (10 minutes) and centrifugation (5000 g) the aqueous phase was separated by freezing in an acetone/dry ice bath and the organic phase is evaporated to dryness using a vacuum centrifuge. Samples were reconstituted in 200 ⁇ l acetonitrile/water mix (1 :1 v/v) and subsequently subjected to LC-MS/MS.
  • the incubation solution (180 ⁇ l) consisted of 90 ⁇ l of a microsomal suspension of 0.33 mg/ml of protein in phosphate buffer 100 mM pH 7.4 and 90 ⁇ l NADP-regenerating system.
  • Compound stability towards rat hepatocytes was determined as follows: The hepatocytes are incubated with the test compound at 37°C. Samples are removed at the appropriate time points into methanol to terminate the reaction. Following centrifugation, the supernatant is analysed by LC-MS/MS. The disappearance of test compound is monitored over a 60 minute time period. The In peak area ratio (compound peak area/ internal standard peak area) is plotted against time and the gradient of the line determined.
  • a solution of 20 mg/ml of each test item was produced by diluting them in the vehicle, 30% HPBCD (hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin) in 20 mM phosphate buffer pH7.0 (v/w). These solutions were stirred overnight at room temperature and heated to 60°C for 10 minutes, resulting in a full solubilization.
  • the application was performed by administrating the solution perorally to the mice, with an application volume of 10 ml/kg. For each time point five mice were used. Blood samples were obtained by sacrificing animals for each time point followed by cardiac puncture. Blood samples were treated with Li-heparin during collection procedure and stored on ice until centrifugation at 645 g (5 min, 4°C).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to compounds which bind to the NR1H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1H4 receptor (FXR). The invention further relates to the use of the compounds for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of diseases and/or conditions through binding of said nuclear receptor by said compounds, and to a process for the synthesis of said compounds.

Description

Heterocyclic FXR binding compounds
The present invention relates to compounds which bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR). The invention further relates to the use of the compounds for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of diseases and/or conditions through binding of said nuclear receptor by said compounds, and to a process for the synthesis of said compounds.
Multicellular organisms are dependent on advanced mechanisms of information transfer between cells and body compartments. The information that is transmitted can be highly complex and can result in the alteration of genetic programs involved in cellular differentiation, proliferation, or reproduction. The signals, or hormones, are often low molecular weight molecules, such as peptides, fatty acid, or cholesterol derivatives.
Many of these signals produce their effects by ultimately changing the transcription of specific genes. One well-studied group of proteins that mediate a cell's response to a variety of signals is the family of transcription factors known as nuclear receptors, hereinafter referred to often as 11NR". Members of this group include receptors for steroid hormones, vitamin D, ecdysone, cis and trans retinoic acid, thyroid hormone, bile acids, cholesterol-derivatives, fatty acids (and other peroxisomal proliferators), as well as so-called orphan receptors, proteins that are structurally similar to other members of this group, but for which no ligands are known. Orphan receptors may be indicative of unknown signalling pathways in the cell or may be nuclear receptors that function without ligand activation. The activation of transcription by some of these orphan receptors may occur in the absence of an exogenous ligand and/or through signal transduction pathways originating from the cell surface (D. Mangelsdorf et al. "The nuclear receptor superfamily: the second decade", Cell 1995, 83(6), 835-839; R Evans "The nuclear receptor superfamily: a rosetta stone for physiology" MoI. Endocrinol. 2005, 19(6), 1429-1438).
In general, three functional domains have been defined in NRs. An amino terminal domain is believed to have some regulatory function. A DNA-binding domain hereinafter referred to as "DBD" usually comprises two zinc finger elements and recognizes a specific Hormone Responsive Element hereinafter referred to as "HRE" within the promoters of responsive genes. Specific amino acid residues in the "DBD" have been shown to confer DNA sequence binding specificity (M. Schena "Mammalian glucocorticoid receptor derivatives enhance transcription in yeast", Science 1988, 241(4868), 965-967). A ligand-binding-domain hereinafter referred to as "LBD" is at the carboxy-terminal region of known NRs. In the absence of hormone, the LBD appears to interfere with the interaction of the DBD with its HRE. Hormone binding seems to result in a conformational change in the NR and thus opens this interference (A. Brzozowski et al. "Molecular basis of agonism and antagonism in the oestrogen receptor" Nature 1997, 389(6652), 753-758). A NR without the LBD constitutively activates transcription but at a low level. Coactivators or transcriptional activators are proposed to bridge between sequence specific transcription factors, the basal transcription machinery and in addition to influence the chromatin structure of a target cell. Several proteins like SRC-1 , ACTR1 and Gripi interact with NRs in a ligand enhanced manner (D. Heery et al. "A signature motif in transcriptional co-activators mediates binding to nuclear receptors" Nature 1997, 387(6634), 733-6.; T. Heinzel et al. "A complex containing N-CoR, mSin3 and histone deacetylase mediates transcriptional repression" Nature 1997, 387(6628), 16- 17; K. Nettles, G. Greene "Ligand control of coregulator recruitment to nuclear receptors" Annu. Rev. Physiol. 2005, 67, 309-33).
Nuclear receptor modulators like steroid hormones affect the growth and function of specific cells by binding to intracellular receptors and forming nuclear receptor-ligand complexes. Nuclear receptor-hormone complexes then interact with a hormone response element (HRE) in the control region of specific genes and alter specific gene expression (A. Aranda, A. Pascual "Nuclear hormone receptors and gene expression" Physiol. Rev. 2001 , 81(3), 1269-1304). The Farnesoid X Receptor alpha (hereinafter also often referred to as NR1 H4 when referring to the human receptor) is a prototypical type 2 nuclear receptor which activates genes upon binding to promoter region of target genes in a heterodimeric fashion with Retinoid X Receptor (B. Forman et al. "Identification of a nuclear receptor that is activated by farnesol metabolites" Cell 1995, 81(5), 687-693). The relevant physiological ligands of NR1H4 are bile acids (D. Parks et al. "Bile acids: natural ligands for an orphan nuclear receptor" Science 1999, 284(5418), 1365-1368; M. Makishima et al. "Identification of a nuclear receptor for bile acids" Science 1999, 284(5418), 1362-1365). The most potent one is chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA), which regulates the expression of several genes that participate in bile acid homeostasis. Famesol and derivatives, together called farnesoids, are originally described to activate the rat orthologue at high concentration but they do not activate the human or mouse receptor. FXR is expressed in the liver, small intestine, colon, ovary, adrenal gland and kidney. Beyond controlling intracellular gene expression, FXR seems to be also involved in paracrine and endocrine signaling (J. Holt et al. "Definition of a novel growth factor-dependent signal cascade for the suppression of bile acid biosynthesis" Genes Dev. 2003, 17(13), 1581-91 ; T. lnagaki et al. "Fibroblast growth factor 15 functions as an enterohepatic signal to regulate bile acid homeostasis" Cell Metab. 2005, 2(4), 217-225). There is one publication which proposes a direct impact of FXR activation on the survival of infectious organisms such as bacteria or protozoic parasites via the upregulation of the lysosomal fate/survival factor Taco-2 in macrophages (P. Anandet al. "Downregulation of TACO gene transcription restricts mycobacterial entry/survival within human macrophages" FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 2005, 250(1 ), 137-144). This might pave the way for further studies that assess the suitability of FXR to act as drug target for the treatment of intracellular bacterial or parasitic infections such as Tuberculosis, Lepra, Leishmaniosis or Trypanosomiasis, e.g. Chagas Disease.
Small molecule compounds which act as FXR modulators have been disclosed in the following publications: WO 2004/048349, WO 2003/015771 and WO 2000/037077. Further small molecule FXR modulators have been recently reviewed (R. C. Buijsman et al. "Non-Steroidal Steroid Receptor Modulators" Curr. Med. Chem. 2005, 12, 1017- 1075).
Many of the failures of drug candidates in development programs are attributed to their undesirable pharmacokinetic properties, such as too long or too short Us, poor absorption, and extensive first-pass metabolism. In a survey, it was reported that of 319 new drug candidates investigated in humans, 77 (40%) of the 198 candidates were withdrawn due to serious pharmacokinetic problems (R. Prentis et al. "Pharmaceutical innovation by seven UK-owned pharmaceutical companies (1964- 1985)" Br. J. Clin. Pharmacol. 1988, 25, 387-396). This high failure rate illustrates the importance of pharmacokinetics in drug discovery and development. To ensure the success of a drug's development, it is essential that a drug candidate has good bioavailability and a desirable Iy2. Therefore, an accurate estimate of the pharmacokinetic data and a good understanding of the factors that affect the pharmacokinetics will guide drug design (J. Lin, A. Lu "Role of pharmacokinetics and Metabolism in Drug Discovery and Development" Pharmacol. Rev. 1997, 49(4), 404- 449). Chemically modifiable factors that influence drug absorption and disposition are discussed as follows.
Some relevant physicochemical and ADME parameters include but are not limited to: aqueous solubility, logD, PAMPA permeability, Caco-2 permeability, plasma protein binding, microsomal stability and hepatocyte stability.
Poor aqueous solubility can limit the absorption of compounds from the gastrointestinal (Gl) tract, resulting in reduced oral bioavailability. It may also necessitate novel formulation strategies and hence increase cost and delays. Moreover, compound solubility can affect other in vitro assays. Poor aqueous solubility is an undesired characteristic and it is the largest physicochemical problem hindering oral drug activity (C. A. Lipinski "Drug-like properties and the causes of poor solubility and poor permeability", J. Pharmacol. Toxicol. Methods 2000, 44, 235-249).
Lipophilicity is a key determinant of the pharmacokinetic behaviour of drugs. It can influence distribution into tissues, absorption and the binding characteristics of a drug, as well as being an important factor in determining the solubility of a compound. LogD (distribution coefficient) is used as a measure of lipophilicity. One of the most common methods for determining this parameter is by measuring the partition of a compound between an organic solvent (typically octanol) and aqueous buffer. An optimal range for lipophilicity tends to be if the compound has a logD value between 0 and 3. Typically, these compounds have a good balance between solubility and permeability and this range tends to be optimal for oral absorption and cell membrane permeation. Hydrophilic compounds (logD <0) typically are highly soluble but exhibit low permeability across the gastrointestinal tract or blood brain barrier. Highly lipophilic compounds (logD > 5) exhibit problems with metabolic instability, high plasma protein binding and low solubility which leads to variable and poor oral absorption (L. Di, E. Kerns "Profiling drug-like properties in discovery research" Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2003, 7, 402-408).
Drug permeability through cell monolayers or artificial membranes correlates well with intestinal permeability and oral bioavailability. Drugs with low membrane permeability, i.e. low lipophilicity, are generally absorbed slowly from solution in the stomach and small intestine. Knowing the rate and extent of absorption across the intestinal tract is critical if a drug is to be orally delivered. Drug permeability cannot be accurately predicted by physicochemical factors alone because there are many drug transport pathways. A generally accepted human cell-based model, human colon adenocarcinoma cell line (Caco-2), helps to predict intestinal permeability (A.M. Marino et al. "Validation of the 96-well Caco-2 cell culture model for high-throughput permeability and assessment of discovery compounds", Int. J. Pharmaceutics 2005, 297; 235-241). This assay is commonly employed during early discovery, especially in lead optimisation. A newer in vitro model, known as the parallel artificial membrane permeability assay (PAMPA) ranks compounds on their passive diffusion rates alone. PAMPA is increasingly used as the first-line permeability screen during lead profiling (F. Wohnsland, B. Faller "High-throughput Permeability pH Profile and High- throughput Alkane/Water Log P With Artificial Membranes", J. Med. Chem. 2001, 44, 923-930).
Plasma protein binding (PPB) can significantly affect the therapeutic action of a drug. It determines the extent and duration of action because only unbound drug is thought to be available for passive diffusion to extravascular space or tissue sites where therapeutic effects occur. The level of PPB is important for predicting the pharmacokinetic profile of a drug and determining appropriate oral dosing. In vivo dose levels can be estimated from the determined fraction of unbound drug (fu); an increase in dose may be necessary if a drug is highly bound to plasma (Y. Kwon "Handbook of essential pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and drug metabolism for industrial scientists" Springer Verlag 2001 ).
In vitro models to predict compound metabolism have become accepted adjuncts to animal testing. Early drug metabolism models help predict the metabolic stability of a compound and there are several approaches to doing this. The enzyme sources in these studies are rat or human derived systems that consist of liver microsomes and hepatocytes. Microsomes contain the full complement of phase I oxidative enzymes but do not have an intact cell membrane. Moreover, microsomes require the addition of a co-factor to the incubation. Hepatocytes are more representative of the in vitro situation because they contain a cell membrane and do not require additional co- factors. Hepatocytes contain enzymes for both phase I (oxidation, reduction and/or hydrolysis of test compound) and phase Il (conjugation of test compounds or metabolites from phase I) metabolism. The microsomal stability screen is often used as a primary screen early in the drug discovery process. The hepatocyte stability assay is used as a secondary screen for the more favourable compounds discovered from the primary screen (T. Iwatsubo et al. "Prediction of in vivo drug metabolism in the human liver from in vitro metabolism data", Pharm. Ther. 1997, 73, 147-171).
In summary, favourable physicochemical and in vitro ADME parameters are prerequisite for a favourable pharmacokinetic (PK) profile of a drug. Obtaining early stage PK data evaluation of new chemical entities is a prerequisite for successful animal pharmacology and toxicology studies. Quantitative measures of drug exposure are key components needed for the sound interpretation of preclinical efficacy studies.
PK data can also help in the design or species selection of preclinical toxicology studies. Pharmacokinetic studies are part of the regulatory drug development requirements and have also started to become an integral part of the early drug discovery process.
It is the object of the present invention to provide novel compounds that are agonists or partial agonists of FXR exhibiting physicochemical, in vitro and/or in vivo ADME (absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion) properties superior to known agonists of FXR and/or superior pharmacokinetics in vivo. Physicochemical and ADME properties affect drug pharmacokinetics and can be assessed by in vitro methods.
Unexpectedly, we found that FXR modulating compounds described herein show improved physicochemical and/or ADME parameters in vitro resulting in advanced pharmacokinetic properties, i.e. a superior bioavailability and a favourable half life in vivo in comparison to the compounds disclosed in the prior art.
As a result, the present invention relates to compounds according to the general formula (I) which bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1H4 receptor (FXR). The invention further relates to the use of said compounds for the preparation of medicaments for the treatment of diseases and/or conditions through binding of said nuclear receptor by said compounds. The invention further also describes a method for the synthesis of said compounds. The compounds of the present invention show improved physicochemical and/or ADME parameters in vitro finally resulting in advanced pharmacokinetic properties in vivo. The compounds of the present invention are defined by formula (I):
Figure imgf000007_0001
(0 including enantiomers, diastereomers, tautomers, solvates and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein
R1 and R2 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, fluorine, cyano, nitro, azido, NR5R6, OR5, SR5, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl; or R1 and R2 are together =O or =S; or R1 and R2 may together form a 3-6- membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring which each can be unsaturated or saturated, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl group, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; R5 and R6 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC6-alkyl and C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R5 and R6 together may form a 3-6-membered saturated heterocyclic ring, wherein the alkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
X is
Figure imgf000008_0001
in each X1, X2, X4
R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, CrC6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -NR19R20 NR19S(O)01R20, NR19C(O)OR20, NR19C(O)R20, NR19C(O)NR19R20, OR19 OC(O)R19, S(O)1R19, SO2NR19C(O)R20, S(O)mNR19R20, C(O)R19, C(O)OR20, C(O)NR19R20 C(NR19JNR19R20 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; in each X3 R3 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, SO2R19, C(O)R19, C(O)OR19, C(O)NR19R20, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R19 and R20 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6-cycloalky, or R19 and R20 together may form a 3-7- membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, and wherein the CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6- alkenyl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R4 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR15R16, NR15SO2R16, NR15C(O)OR16, NR15C(O)R16, NR15C(O)NR15R16, NR15C(NCN)NR15R16, OR15 OC(O)R15, S(O)1R15, SO2NR15C(O)R16, S(O)mNR15R16, SC(O)R15, C(O)R15, C(O)OR15, C(O)NR15R16 C(O)NHOR15, C(O)SR15, C(NR15)NR15R16 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; and further two substituents R4 can be taken together with the atom to which they attach to form a 4-7 membered carbocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, each of which is substituted or unsubstituted with one to five substituents R11;
R15 and R16 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, Ci-Ce-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R15 and R16 together may form a 3-7- membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, and wherein the CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6- alkenyl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R11 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, =0, =S, C1- C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR12R13 NR12S(O)mR13, NR12C(O)OR13, NR12C(O)R13, NR12C(O)NR12R13, NR12C(NCN)NR12R13, =N0R12, -OR12 OC(O)R12, S(0)|R12, SO2NR12C(O)R13, S(O)mNR12R13, SC(O)R12, C(O)R12, C(O)OR12, C(O)SR12, C(O)NR12R13 C(O)NOR12, and C(NR12JNR12R13;
R12 and R13 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl may be unsubstituted or substituted with one to five fluorines and/or one or two substituents selected from OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, =O, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3J2; or R12 and R13 can be taken together with the atom to which they are attached to form a 4 to 6 membered carbocyclic, heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, each of which may be unsubstituted or substituted with one to five fluorines and/or one or two substituents selected from OH, OCH3, -OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, =O, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3)2;
Q is O or NR7; R7 is hydrogen, CrC3-alkyl, or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
T is -O-, -S-, -N(R14)-, CH2 or CF2;
R14 is hydrogen, CrC3-alkyl, or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms; Y is selected from Y1 to Y6
Figure imgf000010_0001
Figure imgf000010_0002
R8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, CrC6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR12R13 , NR12S(O)mR13, NR12C(O)OR13, NR12C(O)R13, NR12C(O)NR12R13, OR12 OC(O)R12, S(O)1R12, SO2NR12C(O)R13, S(O)mNR12R13, C(O)R12, C(O)OR12, C(O)NR12R13 and C(NR12)NR12R13 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
L is a bond, -C(O)N(R10)-, -S(O)mN(R10)-, -G-N(R10)-, -N(R10)C(O)-, -N(R10)S(O)m-, -N(R10J-G-, -G-S-, -G-O-, -S-G-, or O-G; or L is
Figure imgf000010_0003
R10 is hydrogen, Ci-C3-alkyl, or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms; G is methylene or ethylene which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
Z is phenyl-A-R9, pyridyl-A-R9, pyrimidyl-A-R9 or pyridazyl-A-R9, wherein phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl or pyridazyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two or three groups selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C2-C4 alkenyl, C2-C4 alkynyl, cyano, OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3)2;
A is a bond, CH2, CHCH3, C(CH3)2 or CF2;
R9 is hydrogen, COOR17, CONR17R18, C(O)NHSO2R17, SO2NHC(O)R17, S(O)mR17, C(NR17JNR17R18, or tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom; R17 and R18 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, and C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R17 and R18 together may form a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; a is O or 1 ; b is 1 , 2, or 3; c is 1 or 2; i is O, 1 , or 2; and m is 1 or 2.
Preferably, R1 and R2 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, fluorine and Ci-6 alkyl wherein the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; or R1 and R2 are together =0 or =S. More preferably, R1 and R2 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen and methyl. It is preferred that in each X1, X2 and X4 R3 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, NR19R20 or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11, and that in each X3 R3 is hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11. It is further preferred that R19 and R20 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, CrC6 alkyl and C3-C6 cycloalkyl. In an alternative embodiment, R19 and R20 preferably form together a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring. The alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or heteroaromatic groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11.
In a preferred embodiment, Q is O or NH.
In each of X1 to X4, R4 is preferably selected from hydrogen, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, O-Cr C6 alkyl, and CN, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11. More preferably, R4 is selected from hydrogen, halogen and Ci-6 alkyl wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted by one, two or three substituents R11.
The index b preferably is 1 or 2; most preferably b is 2.
The radical R4 may be located on any position of the phenyl ring. Preferably, R4 is located on the 2- and/or 4- and/or 6-position of the phenyl ring. Most preferably, R4 is located on the 2- and 6-position of the phenyl ring.
In a preferred embodiment T is O, CH2 or NR14 wherein R14 is as defined above. Y is preferably selected from Y1 , Y2 and Y3 wherein R8 and c are defined as above.
Preferably, R8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, CrC6 alkyl, OR12, NR12R13, C(O)R12 and C(O)OR12 wherein each alkyl is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11 and wherein
R12 and R13 are defined as above. More preferably, R12 and R13 are independently selected from hydrogen and CrC6 alkyl. In a further preferred embodiment R8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, CrC6-alkyl, or O-CrC3-alkyl, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents
R11, preferably one, two or three substituents R11.
L is preferably a bond, -C(O)N(R10)-, -S(O)iN(R10)-, -G-N(R10)-, or-N(R10)-G, wherein R10 is hydrogen or CrC6-alkyl and i is 2.
It is preferred that Z is phenyl-A-R9, wherein phenyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to three groups selected from halogen, cyano, Ci-4 alkyl, OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3)2. In a preferred embodiment, R9 is selected from COOR17, CONH2 and CONR17R18. Therein, R17 is preferably independently selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl and C3-6 cycloalkyl and R18 is preferably selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl and C3-6 cycloalkyl or R17 and R18 form together a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring. Further, it is preferred that the C1-C6 alkyl group in said embodiment is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R11 whereby R11 is selected from the group consisting of OH, NH2, NH(C1-C6 alkyl) and N(C1-C6 alkyl)2.
In an alternatively preferred embodiment, R9 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, COOH and tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom. More preferably, R9 is selected from the group consisting of COOH and tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom.
Preferred compounds of formula (I) are those compounds in which one or more of the residues contained therein have the meanings given above. It is understood, that the claimed compounds cover any compound obtained by combining any of the definitions disclosed within this description for the various substituents. With respect to all compounds of formula (I), the present invention also includes all tautomeric and stereoisomeric forms, solvates and mixtures thereof in all ratios, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
In the above and the following, the employed terms have independently the meaning as described below:
Aryl is an aromatic mono- or polycyclic moiety with preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms which is preferably selected from phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, fluorenyl, indenyl and phenanthrenyl, more preferably phenyl and naphthyl.
Heteroaryl is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic moiety having 5 to 20 carbon atoms with at least one ring containing a heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S, or heteroaryl is an aromatic ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S and 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Preferably, heteroaryl contains 1 to 4, more preferably 1 , 2 or 3 heteroatoms selected from O and/or N and is preferably selected from pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolizinyl, phthalazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, isoindolyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl, benzofurazanyl, benzothiophenyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl and furopyridinyl. Spiro moieties are also included within the scope of this definition. Preferred heteroaryl includes pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl.
Heterocyclyl is a 3 to 10-membered saturated or unsaturated ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, N and/or S and 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Preferably, heterocyclyl contains 1 to 4, more preferably 1 , 2 or 3 heteroatoms selected from O and/or N. Heterocyclyl includes mono- and bicyclic ringsystems and is preferably selected from pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thioxanyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, homopiperidinyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, oxazepinyl, diazepinyl, thiazepinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2-pyrrolinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, indolinyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, dioxanyl, 1 ,3-dioxolanyl, pyrazolinyl, dithianyl, dithiolanyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydrothienyl, dihydrofuranyl, pyrazolidinylimidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, azetidin-2-one- 1-yl, pyrrolidin-2-one-1-yl, piperid-2-one-1-yl, azepan-2-one-1-yl, 3-azabicyco[3.1.0] hexanyl, 3-azabicyclo[4.1.0]heptanyl, azabicyclo[2.2.2]hexanyl, 3H-indolyl and quinolizinyl. Spiromoieties are also included within the scope of this definition.
C1-C6 Alkyl is a saturated hydrocarbon moiety, namely straight chain or branched alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl.
C3-C6 Cycloalkyl is an alkyl ring having 3 to 6 carbons, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
Carbocyclyl is a monocyclic or polycyclic ring system of 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may be saturated or unsaturated. Thus, the term "carbocyclyl" includes cycloalkyls as defined above as well as partially unsaturated carbocyclic groups such as cyclopentene, cyclopentadiene or cyclohexene.
C2-C6 Alkenyl is an unsaturated hydrocarbon moiety with one or more double bonds, preferably one double bond, namely straight chain or branched alkenyl having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, methallyl, buten-2-yl, buten-3-yl, penten-2-yl, penten-3-yl, penten-4-yl, 3-methyl-but-3-enyl, 2-methyl-but-3-enyl, 1-methyl-but-3-enyl or hexenyl.
C2-C6 Alkynyl is an unsaturated hydrocarbon moiety with one or more triple bonds, preferably one triple bond, namely straight chain or branched alkynyl having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propynyl, butyn-2-yl, butyn-3-yl, pentyn-2-yl, pentyn-3- yl, pentyn-4-yl, 2-methyl-but-3-ynyl, 1 -methyl-but-3-ynyl or hexynyl.
Halo or halogen is a halogen atom selected from F, Cl, Br and I, preferably F, Cl and Br.
Preferred embodiments of the compounds according to the present invention are shown below.
Figure imgf000015_0001
The compounds of the present invention can be in the form of a prodrug compound. "Prodrug compound" means a derivative that is converted into a compound according to the present invention by a reaction with an enzyme, gastric acid or the like under a physiological condition in the living body, e.g. by oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis or the like, each of which is carried out enzymatically. Examples of the prodrug are compounds, wherein the amino group in a compound of the present invention is acylated, alkylated or phosphorylated to form, e.g., eicosanoylamino, alanylamino, pivaloyloxymethylamino or wherein the hydroxyl group is acylated, alkylated, phosphorylated or converted into the borate, e.g. acetyloxy, palmitoyloxy, pivaloyloxy, succinyloxy, fumaryloxy, alanyloxy or wherein the carboxyl group is esterified or amidated. These compounds can be produced from compounds of the present invention according to well-known methods. Other examples of the prodrug are compounds, wherein the carboxylate in a compound of the present invention is, for example, converted into an alkyl-, aryl-, choline-, amino, acyloxymethylester, linolenoyl-ester.
Metabolites of compounds of the present invention are also within the scope of the present invention.
Where tautomerism, like e.g. keto-enol tautomerism, of compounds of the present invention or their prodrugs may occur, the individual forms, like e.g. the keto and enol form, are each within the scope of the invention as well as their mixtures in any ratio. Same applies for stereoisomers, like e.g. enantiomers, cis/trans isomers, conformers and the like.
If desired, isomers can be separated by methods well known in the art, e.g. by liquid chromatography. Same applies for enantiomers by using e.g. chiral stationary phases. Additionally, enantiomers may be isolated by converting them into diastereomers, i.e. coupling with an enantiomerically pure auxiliary compound, subsequent separation of the resulting diastereomers and cleavage of the auxiliary residue. Alternatively, any enantiomer of a compound of the present invention may be obtained from stereoselective synthesis using optically pure starting materials.
The compounds of the present invention can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids, including inorganic bases or acids and organic bases or acids. In case the compounds of the present invention contain one or more acidic or basic groups, the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts. Thus, the compounds of the present invention which contain acidic groups can be present on these groups and can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or ammonium salts. More precise examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids. The compounds of the present invention which contain one or more basic groups, i.e. groups which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids. Examples of suitable acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known to the person skilled in the art. If the compounds of the present invention simultaneously contain acidic and basic groups in the molecule, the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions). The respective salts can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example, by contacting these with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts. The present invention also includes all salts of the compounds of the present invention which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
Furthermore, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of the present invention, or a prodrug compound thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof as active ingredient together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. "Pharmaceutical composition" means one or more active ingredients, and one or more inert ingredients that make up the carrier, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing at least one compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The pharmaceutical composition of the present invention may additionally comprise one or more other compounds as active ingredients like a prodrug compound or other nuclear receptor modulators.
The compositions are suitable for oral, rectal, topical, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous), ocular (ophthalmic), pulmonary (nasal or buccal inhalation) or nasal administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the conditions being treated and on the nature of the active ingredient. They may be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well-known in the art of pharmacy. The compounds of the present invention bind to the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR) and act as agonists or partial agonists of the NR1 H4 receptor (FXR).
FXR is proposed to be a nuclear bile acid sensor. As a result, it modulates both, the synthetic output of bile acids in the liver and their recycling in the intestine (by regulating bile acid binding proteins). But beyond bile acid physiology, FXR seems to be involved in the regulation of many diverse physiological processes which are relevant in the etiology and for the treatment of diseases as diverse as cholesterol gallstones, metabolic disorders such as Type Il Diabetes, dyslipidemias or obesity, chronic inflammatory diseases such as Inflammatory Bowel Diseases or chronic intrahepatic forms of cholestasis and many others diseases (T. Claudel et al. "The Farnesoid X receptor: a molecular link between bile acid and lipid and glucose metabolism" Arterioscler. Thromb. Vase. Biol. 2005, 25(10), 2020-2030; S. Westin et al. "FXR, a therapeutic target for bile acid and lipid disorders" Mini Rev. Med. Chem. 2005, 5(8), 719-727).
FXR regulates a complex pattern of response genes in the liver. The gene products have impact on diverse physiological processes. In the course of functional analysis of FXR, the first regulatory network that was analyzed was the regulation of bile acid synthesis. While the LXRs induce the key enzyme of the conversion of cholesterol into bile acids, Cyp7A1 , via the induction of the regulatory nuclear receptor LRH-1 , FXR represses the induction of Cyp7A1 via the upregulation of mRNA encoding SHP, a further nuclear receptor that is dominant repressive over LRH-1. Since FXR binds the end products of this pathway, primary bile acids such as cholic acid (CA) or chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA), this can be regarded as an example of feedback inhibition on the gene expression level (B. Goodwin et al. "A regulatory cascade of the nuclear receptors FXR, SHP-1 , and LRH-1 represses bile acid biosynthesis" MoI. Cell 2000, 6(3), 517-526; T. Lu et al. "Molecular basis for feedback regulation of bile acid synthesis by nuclear receptors" MoI. Cell 2000, 6(3), 507-515). Parallel to the repression of bile acid synthesis via SHP, FXR induces a range of so-called ABC (for ATP-binding cassette) transporters that are responsible for the export of toxic bile acids from the hepatocyte cytosol into the canaliculi, the small bile duct ramifications where the bile originates. This hepatoprotective function of FXR became first apparent with the analysis of FXR knockout mice (C. Sinai et al. "Targeted disruption of the nuclear receptor FXR/BAR impairs bile acid and lipid homeostasis" Cell 2000, 102(6), 731-744). where under- or overexpression of several ABC-transporters in the liver was shown. Further detailed analysis revealed that the major bile salt excretory pump BSEP or ABCB11 (M. Ananthanarayananet al. "Human bile salt export pump promoter is transactivated by the farnesoid X receptor/bile acid receptor" J. Biol. Chem. 2001 , 276(31), 28857-28865; J. Plass et al. ,,Farnesoid X receptor and bile salts are involved in transcriptional regulation of the gene encoding the human bile salt export pump" Hepatology 2002, 35(3), 589-96) as well as the key enzyme which mediates lipid transfer from lipoproteins to phospholipids, PLTP (N. Urizar et al. "The farnesoid X-activated receptor mediates bile acid activation of phospholipid transfer protein gene expression" J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275(50), 39313-39317), and the two key canalicular membrane transporters for phospholipids, MRP-2 (ABCC4) (H. Kast et al. "Regulation of multidrug resistance-associated protein 2 (ABCC2) by the nuclear receptors pregnane X receptor, farnesoid X-activated receptor, and constitutive androstane receptor" J. Biol. Chem. 2002, 277(4), 2908-2915) and MDR-3 (ABCB4); L. Huang et al. "Farnesoid X receptor activates transcription of the phospholipid pump MDR3" J. Biol. Chem. 2003, 278(51), 51085-51090) are direct targets for ligand- directed transcriptional activation by FXR (summarized in: M. Miyata "Role of farnesoid X receptor in the enhancement of canalicular bile acid output and excretion of unconjugated bile acids: a mechanism for protection against cholic acid-induced liver toxicity", J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 312(2), 759-766; G. Rizzo et al. "Role of FXR in regulating bile acid homeostasis and relevance for human diseases" Curr. Drug Targets Immune Endocr. Metabol. Disord. 2005, 5(3), 289-303.)
The fact that FXR seems to be the major metabolite sensor and regulator for the synthesis, export and re-circulation of bile acids suggested the use of FXR ligands to induce bile flow and change bile acid composition towards more hydrophilic composition. With the development of the first synthetic FXR ligand GW4064 (P. Maloney et al. "Identification of a chemical tool for the orphan nuclear receptor FXR" J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(16), 2971-2974; T. Willson et al. "Chemical genomics: functional analysis of orphan nuclear receptors in the regulation of bile acid metabolism" Med. Res. Rev. 2001 , 21(6) 513-22) as a tool compound and of the semi-synthetic artificial bile acid ligand 6-alpha-ethyl-CDCA, the effects of superstimulation of FXR by potent agonists could be analyzed. It was shown that both ligands induce bile flow in bile duct ligated animals. Moreover, in addition to choleretic effects, also hepatoprotective effects could be demonstrated (R. Pellicciari et al. "6alpha-ethyl-chenodeoxycholic acid (6-ECDCA), a potent and selective FXR agonist endowed with anticholestatic activity" J. Med. Chem. 2002, 45(17), 3569-3572; Y. Liu et al. "Hepatoprotection by the farnesoid X receptor agonist GW4064 in rat models of intra- and extrahepatic cholestasis" J. Clin. Invest. 2003, 112(11 ), 1678-1687). This hepatoprotective effect was further narrowed down to an anti-fibrotic effect that results from the repression of Tissue Inhibitors of Matrix-Metalloproteinases, TIMP-1 and 2, the induction of collagen-deposit resolving Matrix-Metalloproteinase 2 (MMP-2) in hepatic stellate cells and the subsequent reduction of alpha-collagen mRNA and Transforming growth factor beta (TGF-beta) mRNA which are both pro-fibrotic factors by FXR agonists (S. Fiorucci et al. "The nuclear receptor SHP mediates inhibition of hepatic stellate cells by FXR and protects against liver fibrosis", Gastroenterology 2004, 127(5), 1497-1512; S. Fiorucci et al. "A farnesoid x receptor-small heterodimer partner regulatory cascade modulates tissue metalloproteinase inhibitor-1 and matrix metalloprotease expression in hepatic stellate cells and promotes resolution of liver fibrosis'^. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 314(2), 584-595). The anti-fibrotic activity of FXR is at least partially mediated by the induction of PPARgamma, a further nuclear receptor, with which anti-fibrotic activity is associated (S. Fiorucci et al. "Cross-talk between farnesoid-X-receptor (FXR) and peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma contributes to the antifibrotic activity of FXR ligands in rodent models of liver cirrhosis" J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 315(1), 58-68; A. GaIIi et al. "Antidiabetic thiazolidinediones inhibit collagen synthesis and hepatic stellate cell activation in vivo and in vitro" Gastroenterology 2002, 122(7), 1924-1940; I. Pineda Torra et al., "Bile acids induce the expression of the human peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha gene via activation of the farnesoid X receptor" MoI. Endocrinol. 2003, 17(2), 259-272). Furthermore, anti-cholestatic activity was demonstrated in bile-duct ligated animal models as well as in animal models of estrogen-induced cholestasis (S. Fiorucci et al. "Protective effects of 6-ethyl chenodeoxycholic acid, a farnesoid X receptor ligand, in estrogen-induced cholestasis" J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2005, 313(2), 604-612).
Genetic studies demonstrate that in hereditary forms of cholestasis (Progressive Familiar Intrahepatic Cholestasis = PFIC, Type I - IV) either nuclear localization of FXR itself is reduced as a consequence of a mutation in the FIC1 gene (in PFIC Type I, also called Byler's Disease) (F. Chen et al. "Progressive familial intrahepatic cholestasis, type 1 , is associated with decreased farnesoid X receptor activity" Gastroenterology. 2004, 126(3), 756-64; L. Alvarez et al. "Reduced hepatic expression of farnesoid X receptor in hereditary cholestasis associated to mutation in ATP8B1" Hum. MoI. Genet. 2004; 13(20), 2451-60) or levels of the FXR target gene encoding MDR-3 phospholipid export pump are reduced (in PFIC Type III). Taken together there is a growing body of evidence that FXR binding compounds will demonstrate substantial clinical utility in the therapeutic regimen of chronic cholestatic conditions such as Primary Biliary Cirrhosis (PBC) or Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis (PSC) (reviewed in: G. Rizzo et al. Curr. Drug Targets Immune Endocr. Metabol. Disord. 2005, 5(3), 289-303; G. Zollner "Role of nuclear receptors in the adaptive response to bile acids and cholestasis: pathogenetic and therapeutic considerations" MoI. Pharm. 2006, 3(3), 231-51 , S. Cai et al. "FXR: a target for cholestatic syndromes?" Expert Opin. Ther. Targets 2006, 10(3), 409-421). The deep impact that FXR activation has on bile acid metabolism and excretion is not only relevant for cholestatic syndromes but even more directly for a therapy against gallstone formation. Cholesterol gallstones form due to low solubility of cholesterol that is actively pumped out of the liver cell into the lumen of the canaliculi. It is the relative percentage of content of the three major components, bile acids, phospholipids and free cholesterol that determines the formation of mixed micelles and hence apparent solubility of free cholesterol in the bile. FXR polymorphisms map as quantitative trait loci as one factor contributing to gallstone disease (H. Wittenburg "FXR and ABCG5/ABCG8 as determinants of cholesterol gallstone formation from quantitative trait locus mapping in mice", Gastroenterology 2003, 125(3), 868-881). Using the synthetic FXR tool compound GW4064 it could be demonstrated that activation of FXR leads to an improvement of the Cholesterol Saturation Index (=CSI) and directly to an abolishment of gallstone formation in C57L gallstone susceptible mice whereas drug treatment in FXR knockout mice shows no effect on gallstone formation (A. Moschetta et al. "Prevention of cholesterol gallstone disease by FXR agonists in a mouse model" Nature Medicine 2004, 10(12), 1352-1358).
These results qualify FXR as a good target for the development of small molecule agonists that can be used to prevent cholesterol gallstone formation or to prevent re- formation of gallstones after surgical removal or Shockwave lithotripsy (discussed in: S. Doggrell "New targets in and potential treatments for cholesterol gallstone disease" Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs 2006, 7(4), 344-348).
Since the discovery of the first synthetic FXR agonist and its administration to rodents it became evident that FXR is a key regulator of serum triglycerides (P. Maloney et al. J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(16), 2971-2974; T. Willson et al. Med. Res. Rev. 2001 , 21(6), 513-22). Over the past six years accumulating evidence has been published that activation of FXR by synthetic agonists leads to significant reduction of serum triglycerides, mainly in the form of reduced VLDL, but also to reduced total serum cholesterol (H. Kast et al. "Farnesoid X-activated receptor induces apolipoprotein C-Il transcription: a molecular mechanism linking plasma triglyceride levels to bile acids" MoI. Endocrinol. 2001 , 15(10), 1720-1728; N.Urizar et al. "A natural product that lowers cholesterol as an antagonist ligand for FXR" Science 2002, 296(5573), 1703- 1706; G. Lambert et al. "The farnesoid X-receptor is an essential regulator of cholesterol homeostasis" J. Biol. Chem. 2003, 278, 2563-2570; M. Watanabe et al. "Bile acids lower triglyceride levels via a pathway involving FXR, SHP, and SREBP- 1c" J. Clin. Invest. 2004, 113(10), 1408-1418; A. Figge et al. "Hepatic overexpression of murine Abcb11 increases hepatobiliary lipid secretion and reduces hepatic steatosis "J. Biol. Chem. 2004, 279(4), 2790-2799; S. BiIz et al. "Activation of the farnesoid X receptor improves lipid metabolism in combined hyperlipidemic hamsters" Am. J. Physiol. Endocrinol. Metab. 2006, 290(4), E716-22).
But the lowering of serum triglycerides is not a stand alone effect. Treatment of db/db or ob/ob mice with synthetic FXR agonist GW4064 resulted in marked and combined reduction of serum triglycerides, total cholesterol, free fatty acids, ketone bodies such as 3-OH Butyrate. Moreover, FXR activation engages with the intracellular insulin signaling pathway in hepatocytes, resulting in reduced output of glucose from liver gluconeogenesis but concomitant increase in liver glycogen. Insulin sensitivity as well as glucose tolerance were positively impacted by FXR treatment (K. Stayrook et al. "Regulation of carbohydrate metabolism by the farnesoid X receptor" Endocrinology 2005, 146(3), 984-91 ; Y. Zhang et al. "Activation of the nuclear receptor FXR improves hyperglycemia and hyperlipidemia in diabetic mice" Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 2006, 103(4), 1006-1011 ; B. Cariou et al. "The farnesoid X receptor modulates adiposity and peripheral insulin sensitivity in mice" J. Biol. Chem. 2006, 281 , 11039- 11049; K. Ma et al. "Farnesoid X receptor is essential for normal glucose homeostasis" J. Clin. Invest. 2006, 116(4), 1102-1109; D. Duran-Sandoval et al. "Potential regulatory role of the farnesoid X receptor in the metabolic syndrome" Biochimie 2005, 87(1), 93-98). An effect on reduction of body weight was also recently observed in mice overfed with a high lipid diet (C. Lihong et al.TXR Agonist, GW4064, Reverses Metabolic Defects in High-Fat Diet Fed Mice" American Diabetes Association (ADA) 66th annual scientific sessions, June 2006, Abstract Number 856- P). This weight loss effect might results from FXR's induction of FGF-19, a fibroblast growth factor that is known to lead to weight loss and athletic phenotype (J. Holt et al. Genes Dev. 2003, 17(13), 1581-1591 ; E. Tomlinson et al. "Transgenic mice expressing human fibroblast growth factor-19 display increased metabolic rate and decreased adiposity" Endocrinology 2002, 143(5), 1741-1747). In recent patent applications, the effect of FXR agonist on reduction of body weight was demonstrated (Stoffel W. et al. "Methods for inhibiting Adipogenesis and for treating Type 2 Diabetes" International Patent Application WO 2004/087076; S. Jones et al "Methods of using FXR Agonists" International Patent Application WO 2003/080803). Taken together, these pharmacological effects of FXR agonists can be exploited in different therapeutic ways: FXR binding compounds are thought to be good candidates for the treatment of Type Il Diabetes because of their insulin sensitization, glycogenogenic, and lipid lowering effects.
In one embodiment, the compounds according to the invention and pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds are used in the treatment of Type Il Diabetes which can be overcome by FXR-mediated upregulation of systemic insulin sensitivity and intracellular insulin signalling in liver, increased peripheral glucose uptake and metabolisation, increased glycogen storage in liver, decreased output of glucose into serum from liver-borne gluconeogenesis. In a further embodiment, said compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are used for the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of chronic intrahepatic and some forms of extrahepatic cholestatic conditions, such as primary biliary cirrhosis (PBC), primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC), progressive familiar cholestasis (PFIC), alcohol-induced cirrhosis and associated cholestasis, or liver fibrosis resulting from chronic cholestatic conditions or acute intraheptic cholestatic conditions such as estrogen or drug induced cholestasis.
The invention also relates to a compound of formula (I) or to a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for the treatment of gastrointestinal conditions with a reduced uptake of dietary fat and fat-soluble dietary vitamins which can be overcome by increased intestinal levels of bile acids and phospholipids.
In a further embodiment, said compound or pharmaceutical composition is used for treating a disease selected from the group consisting of lipid and lipoprotein disorders such as hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and atherosclerosis as a clinically manifest condition which can be ameliorated by FXR's beneficial effect on raising HDL cholesterol, lowering serum triglycerides, increasing conversion of liver cholesterol into bile acids and increased clearance and metabolic conversion of VLDL and other lipoproteins in the liver.
In one further embodiment, said compound and pharmaceutical composition are used for the preparation of a medicament where the combined lipid lowering, anti- cholestatic and anti-fibrotic effects of FXR-targeted medicaments can be exploited for the treatment of liver steatosis and associated syndromes such as non-alcoholic steatohepatitis ("NASH"), or for the treatment of cholestatic and fibrotic effects that are associated with alcohol-induced cirrhosis, or with viral-borne forms of hepatitis. In conjunction with the hypolipidemic effects it was also shown that loss of functional FXR leads to increased atherosclerosis in ApoE knockout mice (E. Hanniman et al. "Loss of functional famesoid X receptor increases atherosclerotic lesions in apolipoprotein E-deficient mice" J. Lipid Res. 2005, 46(12), 2595-2604). Therefore, FXR agonists might have clinical utility as anti-atherosclerotic and cardioprotective drugs. The downregulation of Endothelin-1 in Vascular Smooth Muscle Cells might also contribute to such beneficial therapeutic effects (F. He et al. "Downregulation of endothelin-1 by farnesoid X receptor in vascular endothelial cells" Circ. Res. 2006, 98(2), 192-9).
The invention also relates to a compound according to formula (I) or a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for preventive and posttraumatic treatment of cardiovascular disorders such as acute myocardial infarction, acute stroke, or thrombosis which occur as an endpoint of chronic obstructive atherosclerosis. In a few selected publications the effects of FXR and FXR agonists on proliferation of cancer and non-malignant cells and apoptosis have been assessed. From these preliminary results it seems as if FXR agonists might also influence apoptosis in cancer cell lines (E. Niesor et al. "The nuclear receptors FXR and LXRalpha: potential targets for the development of drugs affecting lipid metabolism and neoplastic diseases" Curr. Pharm. Des. 2001 , 7(4), 231-59) and in Vascular Smooth Muscle Cells (VSMCs) (D. Bishop-Bailey et al. "Expression and activation of the farnesoid X receptor in the vasculature" Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U S A. 2004, 101(10), 3668-3673). Furthermore, FXR seems to be expressed in metastasizing breast cancer cells and in colon cancer (J. Silva "Lipids isolated from bone induce the migration of human breast cancer cells" J. Lipid Res. 2006, 47(4), 724-733; G. De Gottardi et al. "The bile acid nuclear receptor FXR and the bile acid binding protein IBABP are differently expressed in colon cancer" Dig. Dis. Sci. 2004, 49(6), 982-989). Other publications that focus primarily on FXR's effect on metabolism draw a line to intracellular signaling from FXR via the Forkhead /Wingless (FOXO) family of transcriptional modulators to the Phosphatidylinositol-trisphosphat (Pb)- Kinase / Akt signal transduction pathway (D. Duran-Sandoval et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2005, 280(33), 29971- 29979; Y. Zhang et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U S A. 2006, 103(4), 1006-1011) that is similarily employed by insulin intracellular signaling as well as neoplastically transformed cells.
This would allow to regard FXR also as a potential target for the treatment of proliferative diseases, especially metastasizing cancer forms that overexpress FXR or those where the FOXO /Pl3- Kinase / Akt Pathway is responsible for driving proliferation. Therefore, the compounds according to formula (I) or pharmaceutical composition comprising said compounds are suitable for treating Non-malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as increased neointima formation after balloon vessel dilatation and stent application due to increased proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells (VSMCs) or Bening Prostate Hyperplasia (BPH), a pre-neoplastic form of hyperproliferation, other forms of scar tissue formation and fibrotisation which can be overcome by e.g. FXR-mediated intervention into the PI-3Kinase / AKT / mTOR intracellular signalling pathway, reduction in Matrix-Metalloproteinase activity and alpha-Collagen deposition. In a further embodiment, said compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are used for the treatment of malignant hyperproliferative disorders such as all forms of cancer (e.g. certain forms of breast or prostate cancer) where interference with PI-3- Kinase/AKT/mTOR signalling and / or induction of p27kιp and / or induction of apoptosis will have a beneficial impact.
Finally, FXR seems also to be involved in the control of antibacterial defense in the intestine (T. lnagaki et al. "Regulation of antibacterial defense in the small intestine by the nuclear bile acid receptor" Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U S A. 2006, 103(10), 3920- 3905) although an exact mechanism is not provided. From these published data, however, one can conclude that treatment with FXR agonists might have a beneficial impact in the therapy of Inflammatory Bowel Disorders (IBD), in particular those forms where the upper (ileal) part of the intestine is affected (e.g. ileal Crohn's disease) because this seems to be the site of action of FXR's control on bacterial growth. In IBD the desensitization of the adaptive immune response is somehow impaired in the intestinal immune system. Bacterial overgrowth might then be the causative trigger towards establishment of a chronic inflammatory response. Hence, dampening of bacterial growth by FXR-borne mechanisms might be a key mechanism to prevent acute inflammatory episodes.
Thus, the invention also relates to a compound according to formula (I) or a pharmaceutical composition comprising said compound for treating a disease related to Inflammatory Bowel Diseases such as Crohn's disease or Colitis ulcerosa. FXR- mediated restoration of intestinal barrier function and reduction in non-commensal bacterial load is believed to be helpful in reducing the exposure of bacterial antigens to the intestinal immune system and can therefore reduce inflammatory responses. The invention further relates to a compound or pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of obesity and associated disorders such as metabolic syndrome (combined conditions of dyslipidemias, diabetes and abnormally high body-mass index) which can be overcome by FXR-mediated lowering of serum triglycerides, blood glucose and increased insulin sensitivity and FXR-mediated weight loss. In one embodiment, said compound or pharmaceutical composition is for treating persistent infections by intracellular bacteria or parasitic protozoae such as Mycobacterium spec. (Treatment of Tuberculosis or Lepra), Listeria monocytogenes (Treatment of Listeriosis), Leishmania spec. (Leishmaniosis), Trypanosoma spec. (Chagas Disease; Trypanosomiasis; Sleeping Sickness). In a further embodiment, the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention are useful in the preparation of a medicament for treating clinical complications of Type I and Type Il Diabetes. Examples of such complications include Diabetic Nephropathy, Diabetic Retinopathy, Diabetic Neuropathies, Peripheral Arterial Occlusive Disease (PAOD). Other clinical complications of Diabetes are also encompassed by the present invention.
Furthermore, conditions and diseases which result from chronic fatty and fibrotic degeneration of organs due to enforced lipid and specifically triglyceride accumulation and subsequent activation of profibrotic pathways may also be treated by applying the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention. Such conditions and diseases encompass Non-Alcoholic Steatohepatitis (NASH) and chronic cholestatic conditions in the liver, Glomerulosclerosis and Diabetic Nephropathy in the kidney, Macula Degeneration and Diabetic Retinopathy in the eye and Neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's Disease in the brain or Diabetic Neuropathies in the peripheral nervous system.
In practical use, the compounds of the present invention can be combined as the active ingredient in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. The carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration, e.g., oral or parenteral (including intravenous). In preparing the compositions for oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations, such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions; or carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparations.
Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. If desired, tablets may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1 percent of active compound. The percentage of active compound in these compositions may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 percent to about 60 percent of the weight of the unit. The amount of active compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage will be obtained. The active compounds can also be administered intranasally as, for example, liquid drops or spray.
The tablets, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain a binder such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin. When a dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. Various other materials may be present as coatings or to modify the physical form of the dosage unit. For instance, tablets may be coated with shellac, sugar or both. A syrup or elixir may contain, in addition to the active ingredient, sucrose as a sweetening agent, methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and a flavoring such as cherry or orange flavor. The compounds of the present invention may also be administered parenterally. Solutions or suspensions of these active compounds can be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant such as hydroxy-propylcellulose. Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols and mixtures thereof in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases, the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils. Any suitable route of administration may be employed for providing a mammal, especially a human, with an effective dose of a compound of the present invention. For example, oral, rectal, topical, parenteral, ocular, pulmonary, nasal, and the like may be employed. Dosage forms include tablets, troches, dispersions, suspensions, solutions, capsules, creams, ointments, aerosols, and the like. Preferably compounds of the present invention are administered orally.
The effective dosage of active ingredient employed may vary depending on the particular compound employed, the mode of administration, the condition being treated and the severity of the condition being treated. Such dosage may be ascertained readily by a person skilled in the art.
When treating or preventing FXR mediated conditions for which compounds of the present invention are indicated, generally satisfactory results are obtained when the compounds of the present invention are administered at a daily dosage of from about 0.1 milligram to about 100 milligram per kilogram of animal body weight, preferably given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form. For most large mammals, the total daily dosage is from about 1.0 milligrams to about 1000 milligrams, preferably from about 1 milligram to about 50 milligrams. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 milligrams to about 350 milligrams. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.
Some abbreviations that appear in this application are as follows.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Designation
ADME Absorption, distribution, metabolism, excretion
CI MS Chemical ionisation mass spectroscopy d Doublet
DCC Dicyclohexylcarbodiimid
DEAD Diethyl 1 ,2,-diazenedicarboxylate
DIAD Diisopropyl 1 ,2-diazenedicarboxylate
DIPEA Diisopropylethylamine
DMF; DMFA N,N-Dimethyl formamide
DMSO Dimethyl sufoxide
EDC 1-[3-(Dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide
FRET Fluorescence resonance energy transfer
LC Liquid Chromatography
HPLC High performance liquid chromatography m Multiplett
M.p. Melting point
MS Mass Spectrometry
NMR Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
PAMPA Parallel artificial membrane permeability assay
(Benzotriazol-i-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium
PyBop hexafluorophosphate
q Quartett
Rf Retention factor rt Retention Time s Singlett t Triplett ©-(Benzotriazol-i-ylJ-N.N.N'.N'-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate
THF Tetrahydrofurane
TLC Thin Layer Chromatography
The compounds of the present invention can be prepared according to the procedures of the following Schemes and Examples, using appropriate materials and are further exemplified by the following specific examples. Moreover, by utilizing the procedures described herein, in conjunction with ordinary skills in the art, additional compounds of the present invention claimed herein can be readily prepared. The compounds illustrated in the examples are not, however, to be construed as forming the only genus that is considered as the invention. The examples further illustrate details for the preparation of the compounds of the present invention. Those skilled in the art will readily understand that known variations of the conditions and processes of the following preparative procedures can be used to prepare these compounds. The instant compounds are generally isolated in the form of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, such as those described above.
The amine-free bases corresponding to the isolated salts can be generated by neutralization with a suitable base, such as aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, and extraction of the liberated amine-free base into an organic solvent, followed by evaporation. The amine-free base, isolated in this manner, can be further converted into another pharmaceutically acceptable salt by dissolution in an organic solvent, followed by addition of the appropriate acid and subsequent evaporation, precipitation or crystallization. The carboxylic free acids corresponding to the isolated salts can be generated by neutralization with a suitable acid, such as aqueous hydrochloric acid, sodium hydrogen sulfate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, and extraction of the liberated carboxylic-free acid into an organic solvent, followed by evaporation. The carboxylic acid, isolated in this manner, can be further converted into another pharmaceutically acceptable salt by dissolution in an organic solvent, followed by addition of the appropriate base and subsequent evaporation, precipitation or crystallization. An illustration of the preparation of compounds of the present invention is shown below. Unless otherwise indicated in the schemes, the variables have the same meaning as described above. The examples presented below are intended to illustrate particular embodiments of the invention. Suitable starting materials, building blocks and reagents employed in the synthesis as described below are commercially available from Sigma-Aldrich Chemie GmbH, Munich, Germany, from Acros Organics, Belgium or from Fisher Scientific GmbH, 58239 Schwerte, Germany, for example, or can be routinely prepared by procedures described in the literature, for example in "March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure", 5th Edition; John Wiley & Sons or Theophil Eicher, Siegfried Hauptmann "The Chemistry of Heterocycles; Structures, Reactions, Synthesis and Application", 2nd edition, Wiley- VCH 2003; Fieser et al. "Fiesers' Reagents for organic Synthesis" John Wiley & Sons 2000.
In formulas of general synthesis schemes depicted below EL is halogen, OH, OC(O)alkyl, OC(O)aryl, O-aryl, O-pentafluorophenyl,
O-sulfonylalkyl, O-sulfonylaryl, O-succinylimido, O-benzotriazolyl, nitro, azido, S-alkyl, SO2alkyl, SO2aryl, SC(O)alkyl, SC(O)aryl or cyano;
EN-H is a group acting as a nucleophile; such as OH, SH, NH2, N(R14)H, NH(CO)O-alkyl, NH(CO)O-aryl, NH(SO)2aryl, NH(SO)2alkyl, CH3 or
CF2H;
LA is halogen, NH2, N(R10JH, nitro, azido, CN, CF3, COCI, COF, CHO,
CH2OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O- hetaryl, SH, SMe, SO2CI, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10JH, OH, O-alkyl, G- SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-
1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
LB is halogen, NH2, N(R10)H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH2OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH, SO2CI, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10JH, OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OH)2, B(OMe)2, BF3 ', 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-i ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
Lc is halogen, NH2, N(R10)H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH2OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH, SO2CI, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10)H, OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 ', 4 ,4,5,5-tetramethyM ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl.
R10, R14 and G are as defined in the claims. In preferred embodiments of the synthesis method EL is halogen, OH, OSO2alkyl or OSO2aryl;
EN-H is OH, SH, NH2, Or CH3;
LA is halogen, nitro, azido, CN, CF3, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O- hetaryl, SH, SMe, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10)H, OH, O-alkyl, G-SH, G- OH, G-halogen, B(OH)2, B(OMe)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-i ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
LB is NH2, COCI, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, SO2CI, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
Lc is NH2, CHO, COCI, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, SO2CI, B(OH)2, B(OMe)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl;
In an even more preferred synthesis method EL is chlorine or OH; EN-H is OH or NH2;
LA is halogen, nitro, CN, C(O)O-alkyl, SH, SO3H, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 " or 4,4,5,5-tetramethyM ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl;
L8 is NH2, COCI, COOH or SO2CI;
L0 is NH2, CHO, COCI, COOH or SO2CI.
Pyrazole compounds of general formula IVa are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, are readily synthesized by Standard procedures commonly employed in the art as illustrated in Scheme 1. In case where R1 and R2 are together carbonyl, pyrazole compounds of general formula IVa may be prepared by combining an acetylene compound of general formula Villa with a hydrazone of general formula Ma in acetic acid and in the presence of air to get f-butylatet pyrazole compound of general fomula IHa. Subsequent de-butylation finally leads to a compound of general formula IVa as described in the literature (Kamitori et al., Heterocycles 1994, 38, 21- 25; Kamitori et al. J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1993, 30, 389-391). Another method for preparing compounds of formula IVa involves treating an aldehyde of formula Va with trichloroacetylhydrazine to get trichloroacetylhydrazone Via which is subsequently combined with 1 ,3 diketone compounds of general formula Vila to give products of general formula IVa, as exemplified in the literature (Kaim et al., Synlett 2000, 353- 355).
(Villa)
Figure imgf000034_0001
Scheme 1
In Scheme 1 shown above, the variants R1 to R3, a and b are as defined in the claims. The variant E comprises the variants EN-H and EL having the meaning defined above. Isoxazole compounds of the general formula IVb are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, are readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art (Scheme 2), for example by combining acetylene compound of general formula Villa with an alpha-chlorooxime compound of formula Mb as described by Quilio et al., Gazz. Chim. Ital. 1937, 67, 589. Alternatively, if R1 and R2 are together carbonyl, compounds IVb are accessible by reacting alpha- chlorooxime of formula lib with 1 ,3-dicarbonyl compound Vb as described, for example, by Maloney et al., J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(16), 2971-2974 and by Doley et al, J. Chem. Soc. 1963, 5838-5845. Another method for preparing compounds of formula IVb is especially suitable if R3 is alkylamino and involves combining an acetylene compound of formula Villa with nitrile oxides of general formula VIb as exemplified by Himbert et al., Liebigs Ann. Chem, 1990, 4, 403-407 and in Beyer et al., Justus Liebigs Ann Chem 1970, 45-54.
Figure imgf000035_0001
Scheme 2
Compounds of formula IVc (Scheme 3) are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art, for example by the procedures described by Y. Chen et al, Heterocycles 1995, 41 , 175 and B. Chantegral et al., J. Org. Chem. 1984, 49, 4419- 4424. Compounds of formula IVd are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art, for example by the procedures described by J. Piet et al., Bull. Soc. Chim. BeIg., 1996, 105(1 ), 33-44 and by A. Cwiklicki et al., Arch. Pharm. 2004, 337(3), 156-163. Compounds of formula IVe are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, are readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art, for example by the procedures described by G. Mitchell et al, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1 , 1987, 413-422 and Y. Piterskaya et al., Russ. J. Gen. Chem. 1996, 66(7), 1150-1157.
Figure imgf000036_0001
Scheme 3
The variants of compounds of formula IVa-IVe may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula IVa-IVe by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in the literature, for example in: T. Eicher, S. Hauptmann "The Chemistry of Heterocycles; Structures, Reactions, Synthesis and Application", 2nd edition, Wiley-VCH 2003 (hereafter referred to as Eicher); "March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure", 5th Edition; John Wiley & Sons (hereafter referred to as March); Larock "Comprehensive Organic Transformations", VCH Publishers, New York, N.Y. 1989 (hereafter referred to as Larock); Fieser et al. "Fiesers' Reagents for organic Synthesis" John Wiley & Sons 2000 (hereafter referred to as Fieser).
Compounds of general formula IXa and IXb as depicted in Scheme 4 are known in the art and, to the extent not commercially available, readily synthesized by standard procedures commonly employed in the art, for example by the procedures described by the literature cited above. For specific preparations see examples 1-21.
Compounds of general formula IVa-IVe, IXa, IXb, XII, XIII and XIV may optionally be equipped with a temporarily attached protecting group remaining in the compound after its conversion. In later course of the synthesis sequence the protecting group is removed as taught in: T. Greene, P. Wuts "Protective groups in organic synthesis" 3rd ed. Wiley & Sons 1999 (hereafter referred to as Greene).
A typical synthesis for the compounds of general formula (I) involves a multistep synthesis sequence as depicted in Scheme 4 and in Scheme 5. Starting from heterocyclic intermediates of general formula IVa-IVe, two synthetic routes are envisaged for the first step resulting in an intermediate of general formula XII.
In step A1 , a suitable compound of general formula IXa, equipped with an nucleophilic group chosen from EN-H, is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited to sodium methoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium carbonate, sodium hexamethyldisilazane, lithium diisopropylamide, n-butyllithium or an amine base such as diisopropylethylamine, followed by the addition of a compound of general formula IVa-IVe, equipped with a suitable leaving group EL. If a base is required, it is typically employed in a one to one ratio. However, as the skilled artisan would appreciate, a molar excess, usually in about 1-3 fold molar excess is acceptable. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 1000C, preferably at room temperature and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours. In case where EL is a poor leaving group (OH for example), it needs to be activated by adding activating reagents to the reaction mixture such as MeSO2CI, CF3(SO2J2O or Mitsunobu reagents diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine, for example, as shown in example 1. Preferably, in step A1 the leaving group EL is chlorine or OH. Most preferably, the nucleophilic group EN-H in compounds of general formula IXa is OH. In case where EN-H is OH and EL is chlorine, the reactants of general formula IXa are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, DMF or methanol and typically 1-2 equivalent of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride or sodium methanolate are added. Subsequently a compound of general formula IVa-IVe is added and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours. Reaction temperatures may range from -100C to +600C, typically from -100C to +100C. In case where EN-H is OH and EL is also OH, the reactants of general formula IVa-IVe and IXa are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably benzene or toluene, and 1 to 2 equivalents triphenylphosphine and diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) are added without addition of a base. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 500C, preferably at room temperature. The reaction times are typically 1h to 12h. The solvents are usually removed by distillation at temperatures typically ranging from 10 to 5O0C. The crude product is optionally purified by column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
In step A2, a suitable compound of general formula IXb, equipped with a suitable leaving group EL, is combined with a compound of general formula IVa-IVe, equipped with an nucleophilic group chosen from EN-H under similar conditions as applied in step A1.
Most preferably, in step A2 the leaving group EL in compound of general formula IXb is chlorine and the nucleophilic group EN-H in compounds of general formula IVa-IVe is OH or NH2. In such cases the reactants of general formula IVa-IVe are dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, DMF or methanol and typically 1-2 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride or sodium methanolate are added. Subsequently a compound of general formula IXb is added and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for about 1h to 12h. Reaction temperatures may range from -100C to +600C, typically from -10°C to +1O0C.
The starting materials and products of step A1 and step A2 may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene
In an optional step B the variants of compounds of formula XII may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula XIV by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in
Greene, Eicher and Larock. Such derivatisation reactions are thought to turn a functional group LA in formula XII into a functional group moiety L8 in formula XIV, which is able to undergo a reaction with moiety Lc in compound of formula XIII as depicted in step C (Scheme 5). General methods for functional group interconversions are described in Larock. In one example of step B, LA is a nitro group, which is reduced into an amino group L8. In another example, LA is a nitro group, which is converted into a bromine by reduction, subsequent diazotation and subsequent substitution by a bromide. In yet another example, LA is a SH group, which is interconverted by oxidation into a SO3H group and treated with POCI3 to yielding a
SO2CI group LB. In another example, LA is an COOalkyl ester group, which is saponified into a COOH group L8.
The starting materials and products of step B may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene. ♦ EL\X step A1
LA fcN R1 R2
(IXa) (IVa)-(IVe)
R! R2 step B R1VR2
'NXx
(XII) (XIV)
,EN X step A2 R1 R2
(IXb) (IVa)-(IVe)
Scheme 4
In step C, a suitable compound of general formula XIII bearing a functional group L0 is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably but not limited to dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofurane, benzene, toluene, dichloromethane or ether and, if advantageous, a suitable base is optionally added, including but not limited to sodium methoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium carbonate, sodium hexamethyldisilazane, lithium diisopropylamide, n-butyllithium or an amine base such as diisopropylethylamine, triethylamine or N-methylmorpholine. A compound of general formula XIV, equipped with a functional group LB is added. It is contemplated that variants of compounds of general formula XIII and variants of compounds of general formula XIV are selected in a way that the synthetic combination of functional group Lc with functional group LB results in a moiety L as defined in the description above. If a base is required, it is typically employed in a one to one ratio. However, as the skilled artisan would appreciate, a molar excess, usually in about 1-3 fold molar excess is acceptable. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 1000C, preferably at room temperature and the resulting mixture is typically agitated for from about 5 minutes to about 48 hours. In case where LB and Lc are groups of low reactivity that do not combine under the conditions described above, the use of an activating agent may be necessary. In one embodiment LB is COOH and LA is NH2 or vice versa and coupling agents such as PyBOP; EDC or DCC might be required to ease the reaction. Alternatively the COOH group might be converted into an activated COCI group as described in Larock. In another embodiment where LB is ethinyl and LA is azido or vice versa, a catalyst such as CuSO^ascorbic acid might be required as described in K. B. Sharpless et al., Angew. Chem. 2002, 114, 2708-2711. In yet another embodiment where L6 is B(OH)2 and LA is halogen or vice versa, a Pd catalyst such as PdCI2(PPh3J2 is required as described in A. Suzuki "palladium- Catalyzed Cross-Coupling Reactions of Organoboron Compounds" Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-2483.
The products of step C may optionally be equipped with a protecting group remaining in the compound which needs to be removed in an additional step as taught in Greene. The variants of compounds of general formula I may optionally be further transformed into other variants of compounds of general formula I by using derivatisation reactions known to the person skilled in the art, which are described in Greene, Eicher and Larock. Specific examples of such functional group interconversions can be found in the examples section.
Figure imgf000040_0001
Scheme 5
Optionally, the variants of compounds of formula I may be further transformed into other variants of compounds of formula I by using general methods for single- or multistep functional group interconversions as described in Larock. The skilled artisan will appreciate, that the synthesis steps described above may be optionally carried out in an alternative synthesis sequence, i.e. a compound of general formula XIII may be combined with a compound of general formula IX by the techniques mentioned above and the resulting intermediate is subsequently combined with a compound of general formula IVa-IVe to give products of general formula (I). Such a reversed order of synthetic steps is exemplified in example 19 in the examples section. The particular order of steps required to produce the compounds of formula I is dependent upon the particular compound being synthesized, the starting compound, and the relative lability of the substituted moieties.
Most preferred examples of the synthesis procedures are outlined in Scheme 6 where R3 is alkyl or dialkylamino;
R4 is halogen; b = 2; EL is chlorine or OH; LA is nitro;
LB is NH2:
Lc is COCI or SO2CI;
Y is Y1, Y3 or Y5 ;
R8 is OMe, CH3 or CF3; c = 1 ;
L is -C(O)N(R10)-, -S(OLN(R10)-, -G-N(R10)-;
R10 is hydrogen or methyl; m = 2;
G is -CH2-;
Z is phenyl-A-R9 or pyridyl-A-R9;
A is a bond or -CH2-;
R9 is COOH or COOMe.
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000041_0002
Scheme 6
In step A1 of most preferred embodiments of the invention, a suitable compound of general formula (IVb) is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, preferably tetrahydrofurane, methanol, benzene or toluene. If EL is chlorine, a base is added, for example sodium hydride or sodium methanolate or the like. In case where EL is OH, 1 to 2 equivalents triphenylphosphine and diethyldiazenedicarboxylate (DEAD) are added instead of a base. A compound of general formula IXa is added and the reactants are typically combined at a temperature ranging from about 00C to about 500C, preferably at room temperature. The reaction times are typically 1 to 24h. The solvents are usually removed by distillation at temperatures typically ranging from 100C to 500C. The crude product of general formula XII is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
In step B of most preferred embodiments of the invention, a nitro group in a compound of general formula XII is reduced to give an amino group being part of a compound of general formula XIV. Several reduction methods are suitable as described in Larock, for instance hydrogenation in presence of a hydrogenation catalyst such as palladium on charcoal or the like, or reduction using sodium borohydride in methanol and nickel chloride as catalyst. A reduction using zinc may be carried out as follows: a suitable compound of general formula XII is dissolved or suspended together with zinc powder in a suitable solvent, preferably an alcohol such as methanol and an acid, preferably acetic acid is added. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 500C, preferably at room temperature, until sufficient conversion is detected by methods known in the art, such as TLC or HPLC. The reaction times typically range from 1 to 24h. Optionally, solid byproducts may then be removed by filtration. Volatiles are removed by methods known in the art, such as distillation, for example. The crude product of general formula XIV is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
In step C of most preferred embodiments of the invention, the amino group in the compound of general formula XIV is combined with a sulfonic acid or carboxylic acid moiety or the corresponding sulfonyl chloride or carboxylic acid chloride moiety in compounds of general formula XIII. Several methods are suitable for this transformation as described in Larock, including activating a carboxylic acid group of compound of formula XIII using DCC, EDC, PyBroP or another suitable coupling agent known in the art and combining the activated acid with the amine function of compound of general formula XIV. In the case where carboxylic acid chlorides or sulfonic acid chlorides of formula XIII are employed, a typical procedure is as follows: Amine compound of formula XIV is dissolved or suspended in an appropriate solvent such as dichloromethane, acetonitrile or tetrahydrofurane or the like, typically dichloromethane or acetonitrile, together with a base, preferably an amine base, such as DIPEA, triethylamine or N-methylmorpholine, and the acid chloride compound of formula XIII. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 500C, preferably at room temperature, until sufficient conversion is detected by methods known in the art, such as TLC or HPLC. The reaction times typically range from 1 to 24h. The crude product of general formula I is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
As mentioned above, compounds of general structure I may further be converted into other variants of the same general structure by single or multistep functional group interconversions such as described in Larock.
In most preferred embodiments, an amide or sulfonamide group L is N-alkylated by an alkyl halogen, preferably methyl iodide. In a typical procedure, the compound of generally formula I is dissolved or suspended in a suitable solvent, for example THF at a temperature ranging from -10 to + 300C, typically at 00C and a base, typically NaH is added and the mixture is optionally agitated until deprotonation has progressed sufficiently. An alkyl halogen is added and agitation is continued at a temperature ranging from -100C to +800C, typically room temperature until conversion into the alkylation product is sufficient. The volatiles are removed by methods known in the art and the crude product is optionally further purified by the generally accepted methods, such as extraction and/or chromatography.
In other most preferred embodiments, a carboxylic ester group in compound of formula I is saponified to give the corresponding carboxylic acid of formula I. In a typical procedure, compound of formula I is dissolved in an suitable solvent, such as an alcohol or an ether, preferably methanol, optionally containing 0-50% of water, together with 1 to 10 equivalents, preferably 1 to 2 equivalents of a base, preferably NaOH or LiOH. The reactants are typically combined at a temperature from about 00C to about 800C, preferably from room temperature to 600C, until sufficient conversion is detected by methods known in the art, such as TLC or HPLC. The reaction times typically range from 1 to 24h. The crude product of general formula I is optionally purified by extraction methods and/or column chromatography and other purification methods known in the art.
Unless otherwise noted, all non-aqueous reactions were carried out either under an argon or nitrogen atmosphere using commercial dry solvents. Compounds were purified by flash column chromatography using silica gel 60 (230-400 mesh), or by reverse phase preparative HPLC using conditions as described in the synthesis procedure. LC/MS analysis was done using a Surveyor MSQ (Thermo Finnigan, USA) with APCI ionization, column: Waters XTerra MS C18 3.5μm 2.1x30 mm, injection volume 1 μl, flow rate 1.0ml/min, mobile phase: A: H2O - 0.1 % formic acid; B: acetonitrile.
Gradient table: time, min. A% B%
0,0 100 0
0,1 100 0 33,,00 55 95
3,8 5 95
3,9 100 0
6,5 100 0
Detection: diode array (PDA), 190-800 nm; masspec (APCI + or -). 1H-NMR: 400 MHz spectra were recorded on a Varian MERCURY plus 400 MHz spectrometer,
300 MHz spectra were recorded on a Bruker 300 MHz spectrometer. 200 MHz spectra were recorded on a Varian spectrometer. Chemical shift values are given in ppm relative to tetramethylsilane (TMS), with the residual solvent proton resonance as internal standard. Melting points were taken on a Sanyo Gallenkamp melting point apparatus (MPD350.BM3.5). TLCs were taken using Merck (silica gel Si-60 F254,
0.25 mm) plates and solvents as indicated.
Example 1
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl- pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000045_0001
Step 1
Sodium metal (0.119 g, 5.1 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (6ml) at 0 °C (ice bath), 6-chloro-2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine (0.30 g, 1.7 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 0 °C until the complete consumption of 6-chloro-2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine (4 h). Acetic acid (0.306 g, 5.1 mmol) was added and the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml), washed with water (10 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give 0.28 g (97%) 6-methoxy-2-methyl-3-nitro- pyridine as colourless powder.
Step 2 The product derived from step 1 (0.796 g, 4.7 mmol) was added to a of solution HBr (33%) in acetic acid (5 ml), the mixture was stirred at 600C for 2 h and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in diethyl ether (5 ml), washed with 5% aqueous ammonia (3 ml) and water (3 ml) and the organic phase was evaporated to give 0.63 g (87%) of 6-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol as colourless powder. Step 3
To a suspension of 6-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol (0.625 g, 4.1 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (1.51 g, 5.3 mmol) (for preparation refer to: P. Maloney et al. "Identification of a chemical tool for the orphan nuclear receptor FXR" J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(16), 2971-2974) and triphenylphosphine (1.91 g, 7.4 mmol) in benzene (12 ml) was added dropwise diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (1.57 g, 7.8 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250x20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile:water (2:1) — pure acetonitrile) to give 1.53 g (88%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine as colourless powder.
Step 4
Zinc powder (0.156 g, 2.4 mmol) was added to a vigorously stirred suspension of the product derived from step 3 (0.100 g, 0.240 mmol) in methanol (4 ml), followed by the dropwise addition of acetic acid (0.065 g, 1.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature and passed through a 2 cm layer of silica which was subsequently rinsed with methanol. The eluent was evaporated and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml) and filtered. The filtrate was washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (5 ml), water (5 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give 0.088 g (93%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-ylamine as yellowish oil.
Step 6
To a solution of 6-[3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl- pyridin-3-ylamine (0.137 g, 0.350 mmol) in CH2CI2 (5 ml) were added triethylamine (0.106 g, 1.05 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonylbenzoic acid methyl ester (0.104 g, 0.530 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2h at room temperature, washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (5 ml), water (5 ml) and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure to afford a residue which was further purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250x20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile:water (2:1 ) — pure acetonitrile) to give 0.126 g (65%) of N-{6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}- terephthalamic acid methyl ester as colourless oil.
Step 7
To a solution of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester (0.055 g, 0.1 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) were added NaOH (0.076 g, 1.9 mmol) in water (0.15 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 22 h. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up with water (1.0 ml). The resulting mixture was acidified to pH 6 with acetic acid, leading to the formation of a precipitate. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried on air to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid as colourless powder. Yield: 0.033 g (61%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.37 (6H, d), 2.26 (3H, s), 3.40 (1 H, br. s), 3.59 (1H, sept), 5.13 (2H, s), 6.43 (1H, d), 7.50-7.62 (4H1 m), 7.96 (4H, q), 9.85 (1 H1 s).
LC-MS: rt 3.41 min; m/z [M+H]+ 539.8 (calculated: 539.1).
Example 2
4-((6-((3-(2, 6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- methylpyridin-3-yl)(methyl)carbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000047_0001
NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.011 g, 0.28 mmol) was added to a 0 0C solution of N-{6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}- terephthalamic acid methyl ester from example 1 , step 6 (0.126 g, 0.23 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 ml, freshly distilled) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1h at O0C. Methyl iodide (0.039 g, 0.28 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperature for 17 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in methanol (5 ml), followed by the addition of NaOH (0.012 g, 0.3 mmol) and water (0.15 ml). The resulting mixture was stirred at 5O0C for 3 h and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. Water (1 ml) was added and the mixture was acidified to pH 6 with acetic acid leading to the formation of a precipitate. The solids were filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give N-{6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl- terephthalamic acid as colourless powder. Yield: 0.072 g (56%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.30 (6H, d), 2.08 (3H, s), 3.20 (3H, S)1 3.25 (1H, br. s), 3.44 (1 H, sept), 5.06 (2H1 s), 6.30 (1 H, d), 7.22 (2H, d), 7.44-7.65 (4H, m), 7.70 (2H, d), 9.85 (1 H, s).
LC-MS: rt 3.38 min; m/z [M+H]+ 553.9 (calculated: 554.1).
Example 3
4-{6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl- pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000048_0001
Step 1
To a solution of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl- pyridin-3-ylamine (from example 3 step 5, 0.130 g, 0.330 mmol) in CH2CI2 (5 ml) was added 4-chlorosulfonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.113 g, 0.48 mmol) and pyridine (0.026 g, 0.330 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was further purified by preparative TLC on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1) to give 0.096 g (43%) of 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester as colourless oil.
Step 2 4-{6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.059 g, 0.10 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml) followed by the addition of NaOH (0.076 g, 1.9 mmol) and water (0.15 ml) and the mixture was stirred at 500C for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in water (1.0 ml) and acidified to pH 6 with acetic acid. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin- 3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid as colourless powder. Yield: 0.045 g (78%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.32 (6H, d), 1.95 (3H, s), 3.30 (1 H, br. s), 3.50 (1H, sept), 5.08 (2H, s), 6.31 (1H1 d), 7.12 (1H, d), 7.45-7.58 (3H, m), 7.64 (2H, d), 8.20 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 3.45 min; m/z [M+H]+ 575.8 (calculated: 575.1).
Example 4
4-(N-(6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- methylpyhdin-3-yl)-N-methylsulfamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000049_0001
4-{6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester from example 3 step 1 (0.096 g, 0.16 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (3 ml) at 00C, NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.008 g, 0.192 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 1 h at 00C. Methyl iodide (0.030 g, 0.192 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 17 h. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in methanol (5 ml). Solid NaOH (0.010 g, 0.25 mmol) and water (0.15 ml) were added and the mixture was stirred at 5O0C for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was dissolved in water (1.0 ml) and the pH was adjusted to 6 by adding acetic acid. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)- 5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid as colourless powder. Yield: 0.068 g (72%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz1 DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.35 (6H, d), 2.21 (3H, s), 3.08 (3H, s), 3.30 (1H, br. s), 3.54 (1H, sept), 5.16 (2H, s), 6.31 (1H, d), 6.90 (1 H, d), 7.47-7.59 (3H, m), 7.72 (2H, d), 8.12 (2H, d). LC-MS: rt 3.65 min; m/z [M+H]+ 589.8 (calculated: 590.1).
Example 5
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester
Figure imgf000050_0001
Step i
2-Chloro-6-methoxy-3-nitro-pyridine (3 g, 15.9 mmol), CuI (3.63 g, 36.7 mmol), anhydrous KF (1.8 g, 31 mmol) and dry DMF (20 ml) were placed in a reaction vessel followed by the addition of chloro-difluoro-acetic acid methyl ester (5.61 g, 38.8 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 127-130°C for 8 h under an atmosphere of nitrogen.
The mixture was allowed cool to room temperature, poured into a mixture of aqueous
NH4OH (25 ml) and NH4CI (40 g), stirred for 0.5 h and extracted with ethyl acetate.
The extract was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes : chloroform 10:9) to give 1.5 g (42.5%) of 6-methoxy-2- trifluoromethyl-3-nitro-pyridine as colourless oil.
Step 2
6-methoxy-2-trifluoromethyl-3-nitro-pyridine (0.50 g, 2.3 mmol) was added to a solution of HBr in acetic acid (33% HBr w/w, 5 ml) and the mixture was to stirred at 800C for 16 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes : ethyl acetate 10:1 ) to give 0.396 g (83%) of 6-trifluoromethyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol as yellowish oil.
Step 3 6-Trifluoromethyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol (0.396 g, 1.9 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.653 g, 2.3 mmol), triphenylphosphine (0.898 g, 3.4 mmol) and benzene (15 ml) were placed in an reaction vessel followed by the dropwise addition of diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (0.74 g, 3.7 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure affording a crude product which was further purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes : ethyl acetate 10:1 ) to give 0.66 g (73%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-3-nitro- pyridine as light yellow powder.
Step 4
Zinc powder (0.21 g, 3.1 mmol) was added to a vigorously stirred suspension of 6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-3-nitro- pyridine (0.150 g, 0.310 mmol) in methanol (4ml), followed by the dropwise addition of acetic acid (0.084 g, 1.4 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 2 h at 500C and filtered through a 2 cm layer of silica (eluent methanol). The eluent was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml). This solution was filtered by paper filter, washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (5 ml), water (5 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and evaporated to give 0.124 g (yield 90%) of 6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3- ylamine as yellowish oil.
Step 5 6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin- 3-ylamine from step 4 (0.125 g, 0.280 mmol) was dissolved in CH2CI2 (5 ml) followed by the addition of triethylamine (0.085 g, 0.84 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.139 g, 0.70 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 12 h at room temperature, washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (5 ml), water (5 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and the volatiles were evaporated to afford a crude product which was further purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1) to give 0.053 g (31%) of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4- ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester as colourless powder. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.42 (6H, d) , 3.44 (1 H, sept), 3.92 (3H, s), 5.20 (2H, s), 6.81 (1H, d), 7.24-7.40 (6H1 m), 8.03 (1 H, bs), 8.18 (1 H, d), 8.43 (1 H, d).
LC-MS: rt 3.66 min; m/z [M+H]+ 608.0 (calculated: 608.1). Example 6
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000052_0001
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester from example 5 (0.035 g, 0.058 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (3 ml), a solution of NaOH (0.046 g, 1.2 mmol) in water (0.15 ml) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 50 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in water (1.5 ml). The resulting solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6 leading to the formation of a precipitate which was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid as colourless powder. Yield 0.030 g (87%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.37 (6H, d), 3.40 (1 H, br. s), 3.53 (1 H, sept), 5.23 (2H, s), 6.90 (1 H, d), 7.48-7.61 (3H, m), 7.83 (1 H, d), 7.96 (4H, q), 10.09 (1 H, s).
LC-MS: rt 3.56min; m/z [M+H]+ 594.1 (calculated: 594.1 ).
Example 7
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichlorθ'phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000053_0001
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester from example 5 (0.046 g, 0.080 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (6 ml) at 00C (ice bath), NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.004 g, 0.10 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at 00C. Methyl iodide (0.0142 g, 0.10 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, the resulting residue was dissolved in methanol (5 ml), NaOH (0.066 g, 1.7 mmol) in water (0.2 ml) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, dissolved in water (1.0 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH 6. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4- ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid as colourless powder. Yield: 0.036 g (74%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.30 (6H, d), 3.20 (4H, m), 3.43 (1 H, m), 5.15 (2H, s), 6.82 (1 H, m), 7.05 (1H, m), 7.30-7.60 (4H, m), 7.65 (1 H, m), 7.94 (2H, d). LC-MS: rt 3.52 min; m/z [M+H]+ 607.8 (calculated: 608.1 ). Example 8
4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000054_0001
Step 1
6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin- 3-ylamine from example 5, step 4 (0.132 g, 0.30 mmol) was dissolved in dry acetonitrile (5 ml) followed by the addition of 4-chlorosulfonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.070 g, 0.33 mmol) and pyridine (0.071 g, 0.90 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 12 h at 500C, N-methylmorpholine (0.03 g, 0.3 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 8 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250*20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile:water (2:1) — pure acetonitrile) followed by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1) to give 0.060 g (31%) of 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester as colourless oil.
Step 2
4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.060 g, 0.10 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml), NaOH (0.076 g, 1.9 mmol) in water (0.15 ml) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 500C for 3 h. The volatiles were evaporated and the residue was dissolved in water (1.0 ml), acidified with acetic acid to pH 6 and extracted with ethyl acetate (2*10 ml). The combined extracts were washed with water (3 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid as colourless oil. Yield: 0.020 g (32%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6); δ (ppm) 1.38 (6H, d), 3.48 (1 H, sept), 5.23 (2H, s), 6.74 (1 H, d), 7.35-7.46 (3H, m), 7.62 (1H, d), 7.77 (2H, d), 8.12 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 3.30 min; m/z [M+H]+ 630.2 (calculated: 629.0).
Example 9
4-({6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000055_0001
4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester from example 8, step 1 (0.035 g, 0.050 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (3 ml) at 00C (ice bath), NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.0026 g, 0.065 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at 00C. Methyl iodide (0.028 g, 0.20 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 20 h. The volatiles were evaporated and the residue was dissolved in methanol (5 ml). NaOH (0.010 g, 0.25 mmol) and water (0.15 ml) were added and to the resulting solution was stirred at 50 0C for 3 h. The solvent was evaporated, water (1.0 ml) was added and acetic acid until pH 6. The volatiles were evaporated yielding a crude product which was purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250x20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile: water (2:1) — pure acetonitrile) to give 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid as colourless oil. Yield: 0.01O g (31%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.42 (6H, d), 3.12 (3H, s), 3.53 (1 H, sept), 5.32 (2H, s), 6.73 (1 H, d), 7.22 (1H, d), 7.38-7.48 (3H, m), 7.86 (2H1 d), 8.24 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.34 min; m/z [M+H]+ 644.2 (calculated: 644.1 ).
Example 10
Synthesis of N-{6-[3-(2, 6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- methoxy-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000056_0001
Step i 2,6-Dichloro-3-nitro-pyridine (2.0 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF (10 ml) at 0 0C followed by the addition of methanol (0.30 g, 9.0 mmol) and NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.40 g, 10 mmol) in portions. The mixture was stirred for 1h and poured on ice (50 g). The precipitating yellow crystals of 6-chloro-2-methoxy-3-nitro-pyridine were filtered and dried on air. Yield: 1.8 g (92%). Step 2 β-Chloro^-methoxy-S-nitro-pyridine (0.30 g, 1.0 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (5 ml) at O0C, NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.050 g, 1.2 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at this temperature for 1h, followed by the addition of [3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.20 g, 1.0 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure, water (10 ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2χ10 ml). The combined extracts were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The crude product was subjected to reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250*20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrile:water (2:1) — pure acetonitrile) to give 0.15 g (33%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-3-nitro-pyridine. Step 3
The product synthesised in step 2 (0.23 g, 0.50 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml), zinc powder (0.32 g, 5.0 mmol) was added followed by acetic acid (0.12 g, 2.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at 50°C. The mixture was filtered, washed with methanol (2*10 ml) and the combined filtrates were evaporated. The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 (20 ml), washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (10 ml) and water (10 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and filtered. The solvent removed under reduced pressure yielding 0.20 g (96%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)- 5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-ylamine. Step 4
6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3- ylamine (0.150 g, 0.360 mmol) from step 3 was dissolved CH2CI2 (5 ml) followed by the addition of diisopropylethylamine (0.14 g, 1.1 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.090 g, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was allowed to react for 6 h and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography of the residue on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 1 :2) gave 0.12 g (57%) of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester.
Step 5 The product derived from step 4 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 5O0C for 2 h. The solvent was evaporated, water (10 ml) was added and the mixture was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6, leading to formation of a precipitate which was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried on air to give N-{6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl}- terephthalamic acid. Yield: 0.020 g (67%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.37 (6H, d), 3.49 (1 H, sept), 3.80 (3H, s), 5.16 (2H, s), 6.16 (1H, d), 7.41-7.62 (3H, m), 7.80 (1 H, d), 8.01 (4H, q), 9.42 (1 H, s).
LC-MS: rt 3.40 min; m/z [M+H]+ 555.8 (calculated: 555.1). Example 11
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy- pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000058_0001
Step 1
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3- yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester from example 9, step 4 (0.070 g, 0.12 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (5 ml) and cooled to O0C. NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.006 g, 0.15 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30min. Methyl iodide (0.021 g, 0.15 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperature for 12 h. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure, the residue was dissolved in water (10 ml) and neutralized with acetic acid. The resulting precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.050 g (71%) N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)- 5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid methyl ester.
Step 2
The product derived from step 1 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with water (0.2 ml) and NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 500C for 2 h. The volatiles were evaporated, dissolved in water (10 ml) and neutralized with acidic acid. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried to give the title compound. Yield: 0.025 g (85%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.30 (6H, d), 3.10 (3H, s), 3.40 (1 H, sept),
3.61 (3H, s), 5.10 (2H, s), 5.96 (1 H, d), 7.04 (2H, d), 7.39 (1 H, d), 7.41-7.49 (3H, m),
7.62 (2H, d). LC-MS: rt 3.29 min; m/z [M+H]+ 569.9 (calculated: 570.1 ). Example 12
Synthesis of 4-{6-[3-(2, 6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- methoxy-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000059_0001
Step 1
6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3- ylamine (example 12, step 2, 0.190 g, 0.46 mmol) in CH2CI2 (5 ml) was treated with 4- chlorosulfonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.130 g, 0.55 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.12 g, 0.92 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 10h and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 1 :2) to give 0.070 g (25%) of 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3- ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester.
Step 2 The product of step 1 (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 500C for 2 h. The solvent was revaporated, dissolved in water (10 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH 6, leading to the formation of a precipitate which was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried yielding the title compound. Yield: 0.023 g (77%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.32 (6H, d), 3.31 (3H, s), 3.43 (1 H, sept), 5.11 (2H, s), 6.07 (1 H, d), 7.36 (1 H, d), 7.42-7.58 (3H, m), 7.73 (2H1 d), 8.05 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 3.34 min; m/z [M+H]+ 591.9 (calculated: 591.1). Example 13
4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy- pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000060_0001
Step 1
The product derived from example 12, step 1 (4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester, 0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in anhydrous THF (3 ml) was cooled to O0C, NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.0024 g, 0.06 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at 00C. Methyl iodide (0.009 g, 0.06 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperature for 12 h. The volatiles were evaporated, methanol (5 ml), NaOH (0.010 g, 0.25 mmol) and water (0.15 ml) were added and the mixture was stirred at 50 °C for 3 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo, water (10 ml) was added and the mixture was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give 0.029 g (98%) of 4- ({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl}- methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester.
Step 2
The product derived from stepi (0.030 g, 0.05 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.002 g, 0.05 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and heated at 500C for 2 h. The solvent was evaporated, redissolved in water (10 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH6. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give the title compound. Yield: 0.025 g (83%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.32 (6H, d), 3.06 (3H, s), 3.31 (3H, s), 3.43 (1 H, sept), 5.15 (2H, s), 6.09 (1H, d), 7.38 (1H, d), 7.42-7.61 (3H1 m), 7.68 (2H, d), 8.08 (2H, d). LC-MS: rt 3.37 min; m/z [M+H]+ 606.2 (calculated: 606.1).
Example 14
N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5'isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-4-methyl- pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000061_0001
Step 1
Sodium metal (0.106 g, 4.6 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml) at 00C, 2-chloro- 4-methyl-5-nitro-pyridine (0.2 g, 1.0 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture stirred at 00C for 1 h and at room temperature for 1 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo, water (5 ml) was added, the crystalline precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried to give 0.13 g (68%) of 2-methoxy-4-methyl-5-nitro-pyridine.
Step 2
The product of step 1 (0.13 g, 0.77 mmol) was dissolved in a 0 0C solution of HBr in acetic acid (33% w/w, 5 ml) and then stirred at 600C for 2 h, cooled to room temperature and poured into diethyl ether (10 ml). The crystalline precipitate that was filtered, washed with ether and dried, gaveθ.155 g (86%) of 4-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2- ol.
Step 3 The product derived from step 2 (0.15 g, 1.0 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.28 g, 1.0 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.29 g, 1.1 mmol) in benzene (10 ml) were treated dropwise with diisopropyl- diazenedicarboxylate (0.024 g, 1.2 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The volatiles were evaporated and the crude material was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1 ) to give 0.15 g (56%) of 2-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-4-methyl- 5-nitro-pyridine. Step 4
The product derived from step 3 (0.15 g, 0.35 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) was treated with zinc powder (0.23 g, 3.5 mmol) and acetic acid (0.10 g, 1.7 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 30 min. The solids were filtered and washed with methanol (2*10 ml) and the filtrate was evaporated. The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 (20 ml), washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (10 ml) and water (10 ml), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to afford 0.147 g (98%) of 6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-4-methyl-pyridin-3-ylamine.
Step 5 The product derived from step 4 (0.150 g, 0.380 mmol) was dissolved in CH2CI2 (5 ml), diisopropylethylamine (0.073 g, 0.57 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.090 g, 0.45 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 6 h at room temperature. The volatiles were evaporated and the crude material was purified by column chromatography on silica (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 1 :2) to give 0.085 g (40%) of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-4- methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester.
Step 6
The product derived from the previous step (0.040 g, 0.072 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (2ml), treated with NaOH (0.003 g, 0.072 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 500C for 2 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue redissolved in water (10 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH 6. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3 ml) and dried to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-4-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}- terephthalamic acid. Yield: 0.030 g (75%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.37 (6H, d), 2.15 (3H, s), 3.53 (1 H, sept), 5.07 (2H, s), 6.53 (1H, s), 7.50-7.65 (3H, m), 7.89 (1H, s), 8.04 (4H, s), 9.92 (1H, s).
LC-MS: rt 3.14 min; m/z [M+H]+ 540.3 (calculated: 539.1). Example 15
3-(6-((3-(2,6'dichlorophenyl)'5-methylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-3- ylcarbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000063_0001
Example 15 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 1 using the appropriate starting materials.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, MeOH-d4); δ (ppm) 2.57 (3H, s), 5.08 (2H, s), 6.53 (1 H, d), 7.33- 7.45 (3H, m), 7.54 (1 H, t), 7.84 (1H, d), 8.05 (1 H, d), 8.14 (1 H, d), 8.26 (1H, s), 8.50 (1H, s). LC-MS: rt 3.38 min; m/z [M+H]+ 497.8 (calculated: 498.1).
Example 16
4'(6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-methylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-3- ylcarbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000063_0002
Example 16 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 1 using the appropriate starting materials.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, MeOH-d4); δ (ppm) 2.56 (3H, s), 5.08 (2H, s), 6.53 (1 H, d), 7.32- 7.46 (3H, m), 7.84 (1 H, t), 7.93 (2H, d), 8.07 (2H, d), 8.25 (1H, s). LC-MS: rt 3.43 min; m/z [M+H]+ 497.8 (calculated: 498.1). Example 17
3-(N-(6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-methylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-3- yl)sulfamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000064_0001
Example 17 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 3 using the appropriate starting materials.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, MeOH-d4); δ (ppm) 2.72 (3H, s), 5.22 (2H, s), 6.62 (1 H, d), 7.50 (1 H, d), 7.55-7.65 (3H, m), 7.76 (2H, t), 8.05 (1H, d), 8.38 (1H, d), 8.50 (1 H, s).
LC-MS: rt 3.52 min; m/z [M+H]+ 533.8 (calculated: 534.0).
Example 18
4-(N-(6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-methylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-3- yl)sulfamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000064_0002
Example 18 was prepared by a procedure similar as employed for preparation of example 3 using the appropriate starting materials.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, MeOH-d4); δ (ppm) 2.49 (3H, s), 5.00 (2H, s), 6.40 (1 H, d), 7.25 (1 H, d), 7.32-7.39 (3H, m), 7.52 (1H, s), 7.64 (2H, d), 8.02 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 3.42 min; m/z [M+H]+ 533.8 (calculated: 534.0). Example 19
N-{5-[3'(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-methyl- pyridin-2-yl}-terephthalamic acid
Figure imgf000065_0001
Step 1
3-Methyl-pyridin-2-ylamine (5.0 g, 46.2 mmol) was dissolved in concentrated sulfuric acid (24ml), the mixture was chilled to 0 0C and a mixture of fuming nitric acid (d=1.5, 3.5 ml) and concentrated sulfuric acid (3.5 ml) was added dropwise to the reaction mixture while temperature was kept below 200C. The stirred mixture was allowed to warm to 200C and transferred in portions of 3-5 ml into a second flask which was heated to 35-40 °C (the temperature was not allowed to rise over 4O0C - monitoring carefully the temperature after every addition of a new portion). The resulting reaction mixture was subsequently stirred for additional 30 min at 50 0C, cooled to ambient temperature and neutralized with concentrated aqueous ammonia. This led to the formation of a precipitated which was filtered, washed with water and aqueous DMFA (50%, 6 ml), and recrystallized from DMFA yielding 3-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ylamine (2.52 g, 35%).
Step 2
The product of step 1 (0.96 g, 6.27 mmol), 4-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (2.49 g, 12.5 mmol) and triethylamine (1.27 g, 12.5 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous dichloromethane (20 ml) and the mixture was stirred for 96 h at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was further purified by column chromatography on silica gel (eluent chloroform, then chloroform-methanol 95:5) yielding the bis acylation product methyl 4-[[4-(methoxy-carbonyl)benzoyl](3-methyl-5-nitro-2-pyridinyl)amino]carbonylbenzene carboxylate (1.1 g, 37%). Step3
The product derived from step 2 (0.5 g, 2.1 mmol) was dissolved in dry methanol (20 ml) and hydrogenated at 4 bar H2 pressure and Raney nickel as catalyst (5% w/w). The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica using chloroform- methanol (40:1) as eluent to give 0.189 g (20%) of N-(5-amino-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl)- terephthalamic acid methyl ester.
Step 4
The product derived from the previous step (0.189 g, 0.66 mmol) was suspended in 50% aqueous sulfuric acid (2.3 g) and cooled to 00C. A solution of sodium nitrite (0.047 g, 0.68 mmol) in water (0.5 ml) was added dropwise to the resulting mixture keeping the temperature at 3-5 0C and stirred for additional 30 min at 3 0C and for 2 h at 50 0C. After cooling to ambient temperature a precipitate was formed which was filtered, dried, washed with dichlorom ethane and dried to give of N-(5-hydroxy-3- methyl-pyridin-2-yl)-terephthalamic acid methyl ester (0.13 g, 58%). Step 5
A mixture of N-(5-hydroxy-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl)-terephthalamic acid methyl ester from step 4 (0.135 g, 0.47 mmol), [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl]- methanol (0.124 g, 0.43 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.203 g, 0.77 mmol) in benzene (6 ml) was treated dropwise with diisopropyldiazenedicarboxylate (0.165 g, 0.82 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the crude product was purified by reversed phase HPLC (column Reprosil-Pur C18-A9, 250*20 mm, gradient elution acetonitrileiwater (2:1) — acetonitrile) to give of N-{5-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester as yellow oil (0.025 g, 10%).
Step 6
A solution of the product from step 5 (0.025 g, 0.045 mmol) in dioxane (1.5 ml) was treated with LiOH H2O (0.004 g, 0.09 mmol) in water (0.1 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 days. The mixture was treated with acetic acid (until pH 6), the solvent was evaporated followed by the addition of water (1 ml). The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water (2*1 ml) and dried to give N- {5-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl}- terephthalamic acid as colourless powder, m.p. 218 0C. Yield: 0.016 g (66%). 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CHCI3); δ (ppm) 1.44 (6H, d), 2.30 (3H, s), 3.32 (1 H, sept), 4.81 (2H, s), 7.15 (1 H, s), 7.30-7.45 (4H, m), 7.77 (1H, br. s), 8.18 (4H, q), 10.40 (1 H, br. s).
LC-MS: rt 2.02 min; m/z [M+H]+ 540.0 (calculated: 539.1).
Example 20
N-{6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-isophthalamic acid methyl ester
Figure imgf000067_0001
A solution of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamine (0.128 g, 0.290 mmol) (synthesized as described for example 5, step 4) in CH2CI2 (5 ml) was treated with triethylamine (0.029 g, 0.29 mmol) and 3-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.063 g, 0.32 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, washed with 10% aqueous K2CO3 (5 ml) and water (5 ml), dried (anhydrous Na2SO4) and evaporated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (eluent hexanes:ethyl acetate 3:1) to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-isophthalamic acid methyl ester (0.13 g, 74%) as colourless oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CHCI3); δ (ppm) 1.40 (6H, d), 3.45 (1 H, sept), 3.96 (3H, s), 5.19 (2H, s), 6.80 (1H, d), 7.20-7.40 (3H, m), 7.60 (1H, t), 8.03 (1H, br. s), 8.05 (1 H, d), 8.25 (1 H, d), 8.41 (1 H, d), 8.50 (1 H, s).
LC-MS: rt 2.38 min; m/z [M+H]+ 608.3 (calculated: 608.1). Example 21
N-{6-[3-(2,6-Dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-isophthalamic acid
Figure imgf000068_0001
A solution of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-isophthalamic acid methyl ester from example 20 (0.037 g, 0.061 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) was treated with NaOH (0.044 g, 1.1 mmol) in water (0.15 ml), and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 50 h. The volatiles were evaporated, dissolved in water (1.0 ml) and acidified with acetic acid to pH 6, leading to the formation of a white precipitate which was filtered, washed with water (2χ1 ml) and dried to give N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4- ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-isophthalamic acid as a colourless powder. Yield: 0.032 g (88%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CHCI3); δ (ppm) 1.38 (6H1 d), 3.40 (1 H, m), 5.15 (2H, s), 6.65 (1 H, m), 7.15-7.40 (4H, m), 7.50-8.50 (6H, m).
LC-MS: rt 2.22 min; m/z [M+H]+ 594.1 (calculated: 594.1). m.p. 153.8-154.8 0C.
Example 22
3-((6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)carbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000069_0001
The title compound was synthesized from the product of step 4 of example 5 (6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3- ylamine) by coupling with 3-chlorocarbonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester according to the procedure for step 5 of example 5 and subsequent N-methylation and ester hydrolysis following the procedure described for example 7.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.30 (6H, d), 3.20 (3H, m), 3.43 (3H, m), 5.15 (2H1 s), 7.20-7.80 (7H, m), 7.95 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.20 min; m/z [M+H]+ 608.2 (calculated: 608.1).
Example 23
N1-(6-((3-(2, 6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-N1-methylterephthalamide
Figure imgf000069_0002
To a 0 0C solution of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]- 2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid (example 7) (0.05 g, 0.082 mmol) in dichloromethane (3 ml) was added oxalyl chloride (0.021 g, 0.164 mmol) and a drop of dimethylformamide and the reaction mixture was stirred at 00C for 1 h and then at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml), evaporated and redissolved in dioxane (3 ml). This solution was added to a saturated solution of ammonia in dioxane (3 ml) at 00C and the reaction mixture was stirred at 00C for 1 h and at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue was triturated with hexanes and filtered. The precipitate was washed with hexanes (2*5 ml) and dried to give N1- (6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2-(trifluoromethyl) pyridine-3-yl)-N1-methylterephthalamide (0.044 g, 88% yield) as light yellow powder.
M. p. 229 0C (decomposition).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.30 (6H, m), 3.30 (3H, s), 3.40 (1 H, m), 5.15 (2H, s), 7.10-8.10 (11 H, m).
LC-MS: rt 2.01 min; m/z [M+H]+ 607.2 (calculated: 607.1).
Example 24
N1-(6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-N1,N4,N4-trimethylterephthalamide
Figure imgf000070_0001
To a 00C solution of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N-methyl-terephthalamic acid (example 7) (0.050 g, 0.082 mmol) in dichloromethane (3 ml) was added oxalyl chloride (0.021 g, 0.164 mmol) and one drop of dimethylformamide and the reaction mixture was stirred at 00C for 1 h and at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated, redissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml), again evaporated and redissolved in dioxane (3 ml). This solution was chilled at 00C and then added to a 00C 20% solution of dimethylamine in tetrahydrofurane (3 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C for 1 h and at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated and the crude material was purified by preparative TLC on silica to give the title compound as white powder. Yield: 0.036 g (69%).
M.p. 166.8-167.8 0C.
1H-NMR (400 MHz1 DMSOd6); δ (ppm) 1.35 (6H, m), 2.84 (3H, s), 3.05 (3H, s), 3.35 (3H, s), 3.45 (1H1 m), 5.20 (2H, s), 6.70-7.00 (1 H, m), 7.20-7.90 (9H, m).
LC-MS: rt 2.09 min; m/z [M+H]+ 635.3 (calculated: 635.1).
Example 25
N-(6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-N-methyl-4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzamide
Figure imgf000071_0001
Step i
To a solution of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamine (0.30 g, 0.67 mmol) derived from step 4 of example 5 and triethylamine (0.082 g, 0.81 mmol) in dichlorormethane (7 ml) was added a suspension of 4-cyano-benzoyl chloride (0.133 g, 0.810 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at room temperature and refluxed for 9 h and the volatiles were evaporated. The crude material was separated by column chromatography on silica (eluent: dichloromethane) to give 0.12 g of 4-cyano-N-{6-[3- (2>6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-sopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3- yljbenzamide in 31% yield. Step 2
A 60% suspension of sodium hydride in mineral oil (0.025 g, 0.50 mmol) was added to the product of step 1 (0.17 g, 0.29 mmol) in dry THF (10 ml) under argon and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes. A solution of iodomethane (0.085 g, 0.60 mmol) in dry THF (1 ml) was added dropwise and the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (5 ml), extracted with dichloromethane (3x10 ml), dried over MgSO4 and evaporated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica to give 4-cyano-N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-N- methylbenzamide (0.11 g, 63 %).
Step 3
Sodium azide (0.018 g, 0.27 mmol) and solid NH4CI (0.018 g, 0.33 mmol) were added to a solution of the product derived from step 2 (0.052 g, 0.088 mmol) in DMF (0.6 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred intensively for 10 h at 75°C and for 8 h at 1000C. After cooling to room temperature the reaction mixture was diluted with water (2 ml), acidified to pH 5 using 10% aqueous HCI and extracted with dichloromethane (3x5 ml). This organic extract was dried (MgSO4) and evaporated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica (eluent methanol-dichloromethane 1 :3) to give 0.02 g (36%) of the title compound. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.15-1.45 (6H, m), 3.30 (3H, s), 3.45 (1 H, m), 5.20 (2H, s), 6.75-6.95 (1 H, m), 7.10-7.30 (1H, m), 7.30-7.60 (4H, m), 7.75-7.90 (1 H, m), 7.90-8.15 (2H, m).
LC-MS: rt 2.13 min; m/z [M+H]+ 631.8 (calculated: 632.1).
Example 26
4-((5-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-3-methylpyridin- 2-yl)(methyl)carbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000073_0001
To a solution of N-{5-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3- methyl-pyridin-2-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester (synthesised as described for step 5 of example 19, 0.096 g, 0.176 mmol) in dry THF (5 ml) at O0C was added a 60% suspension of sodium hydride in mineral oil (0.01 g, 0.26 mmol). Stirring was continued for 30 minutes, then methyl iodide (0.037 g, 0.26 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture. After 5 h, sodium hydroxide (0.035 g, 0.87 mmol) and water (0.2 ml) were added and stirring was continued for 4 h. The mixture was evaporated, the residue was treated with water (1 ml), the solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6, extracted with chloroform (3*20 ml), the combined extracts were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC chromatography eluting with acetonitrile-water to provide N-{5-[3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl}-N-methyl- terephthalamic acid as yellow oil. Yield: 0.016 g (17%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.41 (6H, d), 2.00 (3H, s), 3.25-3.40 (1 H, m), 3.40 (3H, s), 4.72 (2H, s), 6.62 (1H, s), 7.29-7.50 (5H, m), 7.78-7.92 (3H, m). Cl MS m/z 554 (MH+). Example 27
4-((6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (triflυoromethyl)pyridin-3-ylamino)methyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000074_0001
Step 1
The product synthesized by the method described for example 5, step 4, {6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamine} (0.579 g, 1.3 mmol) and 4-formyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.639 g, 3.9 mmol) was dissolved in 1 ,2-dichloroethane (20 ml) and glacial acetic acid (0.468 g, 7.8 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then sodium triacetoxy-borohydride (1.24 g, 5.9 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 24 h. A saturated aqueous solution of sodium hydrogencarbonate (15 ml) was added and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (3*20 ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue was purified by HPLC (reversed phase, eluent: acetonitrile-water) to provide 0.38 g (49%) 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl- isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamino}-methyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester as a white powder.
Step 2 The product derived from step 1 (0.026 g, 0.044 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 ml) and a solution of sodium hydroxide (0.018 g, 0.44 mmol) in water (0.2 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was treated with water (1 ml). The resulting solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6. The formed precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3x1 ml) and dried on air to provide 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)- 5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamino}-methyl)-benzoic acid as a white powder. Yield: 0.017 g (68%).
M. p. 259.1-260.1 0C. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.27 (6H, d), 3.35-3.55 (1H, m), 4.44 (2H, s), 5.02 (2H, s), 6.06 (1 H, br. s), 6.54 (1H, d), 7.06 (1H, d), 7.38 (2H, d), 7.40-7.50 (3H, m), 7.87 (2H1 d).
LC-MS: rt 2.12 min; m/z [M+H]+ 580.1 (calculated: 580.1 ).
Example 28
4-(((6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol'4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000075_0001
Step i
The product derived from example 27, step 1 , 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-ylamino}-methyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester, (0.076 g, 0.128 mmol) was dissolved in 1 ,2-dichloroethane (5 ml) and paraformaldehyde (0.023 g, 0.77 mmol), acetic acid (0.046 g, 0.77 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.163 g, 0.77 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture was diluted with saturated aqueous sodium hydrogencarbonate and extracted with three portions of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue was purified by preparative TLC on silica (eluent hexane-ethyl acetate 5:1 ) to obtain 0.046 g (59%) of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]- benzoic acid methyl ester as a colourless oil.
LC-MS m/z 608 (MH+). Step 2 A suspension of the product derived from step 1 (0.046 g, 0.076 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) was treated with sodium hydroxide (0.03 g, 0.76 mmol) and water (0.3 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was diluted with water (1 ml). The resulting solution was acidified with acetic acid to pH 6 and the formed precipitate was filtered, washed with water (3x5 ml) and dried on air to obtain the title product as a white powder. Yield: 0.030 g (66%).
M.p. 96.1-97.1 0C.
1H-NMR (400 MHz1 DMSOd6); δ (ppm) 1.31 (6H, d), 2.48 (3H, s), 3.41-3.57 (1H, m), 4.00 (2H, s), 5.19 (2H, s), 6.81 (1 H, d), 7.33 (2H, d), 7.40-7.52 (3H, m), 7.84 (2H, d), 7.96 (1 H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.21 min; m/z [M-H]" 592.2 (calculated: 592.1).
Example 29
4-((6-((1-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-4-isopropyl-1H-1,2,3-triazol-5-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)carbamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000076_0001
Step 1
A mixture of 2,6-dichlorophenyl azide (25 g, 0.13 mol) in toluene (500 ml) and 4- methylpent-2-yn-1-ol (52.1 g, 0.53 mol) was refluxed under argon for 35 hours. Toluene was removed under vacuum and the resulting residue was purified by column chromatography using silica gel (100-200 mesh) and eluting with 14% ethyl acetate in hexanes to give the desired (1-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-4-isopropyl-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazol-5- yl)methanol (4.5 g, 23% yield) next to regioisomeric (1-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5- isopropyl-1H-1 ,2,3-triazol-4-yl)methanol as byproduct.
1H-NMR (200 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 1.4 (d, 6H), 3.15-3.25 (m, 1 H), 4.57 (s, 2H) and 7.4-7.6 (m, 3H). Step 2
The product synthesized in step 2 of example 5, (5-nitro-6-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-ol)
(0.080 g, 0.38 mmol) and (1-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-4-isopropyl-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazol-5- yl)methanol (0.100 g, 0.35 mmol) derived from the previous step of this example and triphenylphosphine (0.165 g, 0.63 mmol) were dissolved in benzene (10 ml) and diisopropyl 1 ,2-diazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) (0.134 g, 0.67 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 h and evaporated and the crude material was purified by preparative HPLC (eluent acetonitrile-water) to give 0.150 g (90%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H- [1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-nitro-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridine as yellow powder.
LC-MS m/z 476 (MH+). Step 3
6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-3-nitro-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridine (0.159 g, 0.33 mmol) from the previous step and zinc powder (0.217 g, 3.3 mmol) were dissolved in methanol (10 ml) and glacial acetic acid (0.089 g, 1.49 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 h. The reaction mixture was passed through a short column with silica and the eluate was evaporated. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 ml), the solution was washed with 10% aqueous potassium carbonate (5 ml) and brine (2χ10 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to obtain 0.138 g (94%) of 6-[3- (2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylamine as yellow oil which was used in the next step without further purification.
Cl MS m/z 446 (MH+). Step 4
The product derived from the previous step (0.138 g, 0.31 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (5 ml) and triethylamine (0.031 g, 0.31 mmol) and 4-chlorocarbonyl- benzoic acid methyl ester (0.062 g, 0.31 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 h. Dichloromethane (20 ml) was added and the mixture was washed with 10% aqueous potassium carbonate (5 ml) and brine (2*5 ml) and dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC (reversed phase, eluent acetonitrile-water) to give 0.050 g (27%) of N-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-terephthalamic acid methyl ester as white powder.
Cl MS m/z 608 (MH+). Step 5 The product derived from the previous step (0.050 g, 0.082 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (5 ml) and a 60% suspension of sodium hydride in mineral oil (0.005 g, 0.123 mmol) was added at 00C for 15 min. lodomethane (0.018 g, 0.123 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 00C for 1 h and for another 11 h at room temperature. Sodium hydroxide (0.062 g, 1.6 mmol) and water (0.5 ml) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 0C for 16 h and evaporated. The residue was mixed with water (1 ml) and neutralized with acetic acid to ~ pH 6. The formed precipitate was filtered, washed with water (2*3 ml), hexanes (2*3 ml) and dried to give 0.038 g (76%) of the title compound.
M.p. 218-219 0C. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.10-1.45 (6H1 m), 3.22 (3H, br. s), 3.40 (1 H, m), 5.40 (2H, s), 6.80-6.95 (1 H, m), 7.15-7.32 (1H, m), 7.42-7.70 (4H, m), 7.70-7.85 (1 H, m), 7.90-8.15 (2H, m).
LC-MS: rt 1.86 min; m/z [M+H]+ 608.2 (calculated: 608.1 ).
Example 30
4-(N-(6-((1~(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-4-isopropyl-1H-1,2,3-triazol-5-yl)methoxy)-2- methylpyridin-3-yl)-N-methylsulfamoyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000078_0001
Step i
To a mixture of 6-methyl-5-nitro-pyridin-2-ol (0.055 g, 0.36 mmol) and [3-(2,6-dichloro- phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-yl]-methanol (0.100 g, 0.35 mmol) prepared as described for example 29, step 1, and triphenylphosphine (0.159 g, 0.61 mmol) in benzene (10 ml) was added dropwise diisopropyl 1 ,2-diazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) (0.128 g, 0.63 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated and the residue was purified by HPLC to give 0.122 g (83%) of 6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]- 2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine as beige powder. Cl MS m/z 422 (MH+). Step 2
To a mixture of the product derived from step 1 (0.124 g, 0.30 mmol) and zinc powder (0.195 g, 3.0 mmol) in methanol (6 ml) was added dropwise glacial acetic acid (0.081 g, 1.35 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 600C for 16 h and passed through a short column with silica, the eluate was evaporated, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (30 ml), washed with 10% aqueous potassium carbonate (10 ml), brine (10 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to obtain 0.107 g (91%) of 6-[3-(2,6- dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-ylamine as yellow oil. Cl MS m/z 392 (MH+). Step 3
6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-thfluoromethyl- pyridin-3-ylamine (0.107 g, 0.27 mmol) synthesized in the previous step was dissolved in acetonitrile (6 ml), pyridine (0.021 g, 0.27 mmol) and 4-chlorosulfonyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.076 g, 0.32 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and volatiles were evaporated. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 0.038 g (18%) of 4-{6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfamoyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester as yellow oil. Cl MS m/z 590 (MH+). Step 4
The product synthesized in the previous step (0.033 g, 0.056 mmol) was dissolved in benzene (5 ml), methanol (0.04 g, 1.3 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.047 g, 0.18 mmol) were added followed by dropwise addition of diisopropyl 1 ,2- diazenedicarboxylate (DIAD) (0.044 g, 0.22 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and the volatiles were evaporated. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC (eluent acetonitrile-water) to give 0.022 g (65%) of 4-({6- [3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3- yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester as a colorless oil. Cl MS m/z 604 (MH+). Step 5
The compound synthesized in the previous step, 4-({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5- isopropyl-3H-[1 ,2,3]triazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-methyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-sulfamoyl)- benzoic acid methyl ester, (0.022 g, 0.036 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (2 ml) and sodium hydroxide (0.014 g, 0.36 mmol) and water (0.25 ml) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 500C for 8 h. Volatiles were evaporated, water (1 ml) was added and the mixture was neutralized with acetic acid to pH 7. The formed precipitate was filtered and dried to give the title compound, yield: 0.015 g (71%).
M. p. 127.8-128.8 0C. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ (ppm) 1.45 (6H, d), 2.30 (3H, s), 3.12 (3H, s), 3.25- 3.40 (1 H, m), 4.30 (1 H, br. s), 5.34 (2H, s), 6.27 (1H, d), 6.81 (1H, d), 7.35-7.48 (3H, m), 7.71 (2H, d), 8.18 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 1.94 min; m/z [M+H]+ 590.2 (calculated: 590.1 ).
Example 31
4-(((3-Chloro-5-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)pyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000081_0001
Step 1
To a suspension of 2,3-dichloro-5-nitropyridine (1.01 g, 5.22 mmol) and methyl 4- (aminomethyl)-benzoate hydrochloride (1.58 g, 7.83 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) in 2-propanol (15ml) was added DIPEA (2.7 ml, 15.7 mmol, 3 equiv.) at room temperature, and the mixture was heated at 600C for 1.25 h. After cooling back to room temperature, the solvent was removed under vacuum, and the residue was suspended in water (40 ml). The solid was filtered and washed with several portions of water until the filtrate remained colorless (approx. 100 ml), and the remaining solid was washed with a small amount of hexane. The obtained product was dried under high vacuum to give 1.54 g (4.79 mmol, 92%) of methyl 4-((3-chloro-5-nitropyridin-2-ylamino)methyl)benzoate as a bright yellow solid.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4:1) Rf: 0.15.
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.87 (d, J = 2.4, 1 H), 8.62 (t, J = 6.2, 1H), 8.42 (d, J = 2.4, 1 H), 7.91 (d, J = 8.4, 2H), 7.44 (d, J = 8.5, 2H), 4.79 (d, J = 6.0, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H).
Step 2 A suspension of sodium hydride (60%) (230 mg, 5.74 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) in DMF (5 ml) was cooled to 0 0C, and a solution of the amine product from step 1 (1.54 g, 4.79 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added dropwise. The dark-brown mixture was stirred at 00C for 40 min, and methyl iodide (0.42 ml, 6.70 mmol, 1.4 equiv.) was dropwise added at 0 0C. The mixture was stirred at 00C for 1 h and at room temperature for 45 min and was then poured into a mixture of brine, water and EtOAc (80 ml each). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2*30 ml), the combined organic layer was washed with %-saturated NaCI solution (2x40 ml) and brine (20 ml), dried (Na2SO4), and the solvent was removed under vacuum. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (hexane/EtOAc 6:1 to 4:1) to afford methyl 4-(((3-chloro-5- nitropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate (1.25 g, 3.73 mmol, 78%) as a yellow solid. C15H14CIN3O4, MW 335.8. TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4:1 ) Rf: 0.23.
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.95 (d, J = 2.4, 1 H), 8.44 (d, J = 2.4, 1 H), 7.91 (d, J = 8.4, 2H), 7.44 (d, J = 8.5, 2H), 5.01 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.23 (s, 3H).
Step 3
To a suspension of the compound synthesised in step 2 (572 mg, 1.70 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) and water (4 ml) was added sodium dithionite (1.48 g, 8.52 mmol, 5 equiv.), and the mixture was stirred at 900C for 50 min. After cooling to room temperature, the methanol was evaporated, and the residue was taken up with Vz- saturated NaCI solution (50 ml) and EtOAc (40 ml). The phases were separated, the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3*50 ml), and the combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (hexane/EtOAc 1 :1), yielding 205 mg (0.67 mmol, 39%) of methyl 4-(((5-amino-3-chloropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate as a bright brown solid. C15H16CIN3O2, MW 305.8.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 1 :1) Rf: 0.16. CI-MS: 306, 308 ([M+H]+).
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.90 (d, J = 8.3, 2H), 7.61 (d, J = 2.5, 1H), 7.48 (d, J = 8.6, 2H), 7.07 (d, J = 2.5, 1 H), 5.17 (s, 2H), 4.24 (s, 2H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 2.60 (s, 3H).
Step 4
To a suspension of 4-(((5-amino-3-chloropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from the previous step (76 mg, 0.25 mmol) in diiodomethane (1.3 ml) was added isoamylnitrite (0.67 ml, 4.97 mmol, 5 equiv.) at room temperature. The formed dark- brown mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 min, and two drops of 50% aqueous hydroiodic acid were added (gas evolution!). The black mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.75 h, cone. aq. ammonia (5 ml) was added, and the mixture was vigorously stirred for further 15 min. Extraction with CH2CI2 (three times), drying of the combined organic layer (Na2SO4) and evaporation of the solvent gave a black liquid which was co-evaporated with methanol/acetone (10:1 ; 3*20 ml). The residue was purified by flash chromatography (hexane to hexane/EtOAc 6:1) to give methyl 4- (((3-chloro-5-iodopyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate (49 mg, 0.12 mmol, 47%) as a pale yellow resin. Ci5H14CIIN2O2, MW 416.6.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4:1) Rf: 0.40. 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.34 (d, J = 2.1 , 1 H), 8.11 (d, J = 2.0, 1 H), 7.93 (d, J = 8.4, 2H), 7.45 (d, J = 8.5, 2H), 4.62 (s, 2H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 2.88 (s, 3H).
Step 5 lodopyridine synthesized in the previous step (46 mg, 0.11 mmol, 1 equiv.), (3-(2,6- dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methanol (158 mg, 0.55 mmol, 5 equiv.) as described in step 3 of example 1 , copper(l)-iodide (8.4 mg, 0.044 mmol, 0.4 equiv.), 1 ,10-phenanthroline (16 mg, 0.088 mmol, 0.8 equiv.) and Cs2CO3 (72 mg, 0.22 mmol, 2 equiv.) were placed in a screw-cap tube under argon, suspended in anhydrous toluene (0.5 ml), the mixture was flushed with argon, and the screw-cap was closed. The mixture was stirred at 1200C for 14.5 h. After cooling to room temperature, the dark brown suspension was diluted with CH2CI2 (approx. 1 ml) and directly submitted to flash chromatography (hexane to hexane/EtOAc 6:1 to 2:1). 67 mg (0.081 mmol, 73%) of coupling product (3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methyl 4- (((3-chloro-5-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-2- yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate were obtained as yellow-green resin. C40H35CI5N4O5, MW: 829.0.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 1 :1) Rf: 0.56.
CI-MS: 576, 574 [IVH-MeOH]+, 546, 544, 286, 270.
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.73 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.66 (d, J = 8.3, 2H), 7.63-7.48 (m, 6H), 7.42 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.39 (d, J = 8.4, 2H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 4.89 (s, 2H), 4.35 (s, 2H), 3.53 (pseudo-quint, J = 7.0, 1H), 3.44 (pseudo-quint, J = 6.8, 1H), 2.69 (s, 3H), 1.36 (d, J = 7.0, 6H), 1.31 (d, J = 7.0, 6H).
Step 6
The coupling product synthesized in the previous step (65 mg, 0.078 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of THF (2.1 ml), methanol (0.7 ml) and water (0.7 ml), and LiOH H2O (33 mg, 0.78 mmol, 10 equiv.) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5.5 h. THF and methanol were removed under reduced pressure, the remaining solution was diluted with water (0.5 ml), cooled to 00C, and 1N HCI was dropwise added until pH 5 was reached (approx. 0.72 ml). The solids were dissolved with EtOAc, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with small amounts of EtOAc. The combined organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), the solvent was evaporated, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (EtOAc to EtOH with EtOAc/EtOH-gradients). 32 mg (0.058 mmol, 73%) of final product 4-(((3-Chloro-5-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy) pyridin-2-yl) (methyl)amino)methyl)benzoic acid were obtained as slightly yellow solid. C27H24CI3N3O4, MW: 560.9.
TLC (EtOAc) Rf: 0.16 APCI-MS: 560, 562 ([M+H]+).
1H-NMR (DMSO-de): 7.77 (d, J = 7.9, 2H), 7.75 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.64-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.40 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.19 (d, J = 8.0, 2H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 4.28 (s, 2H), 3.52-3.36 (m, 1 H), 2.66 (s, 3H), 1.33 (d, J = 7.0, 6H).
Example 32
S-tffS-Chloro-S-ffS-faβ-dichlorophenylJ-S-isopropylisoxazoM- yl)methoxy)pyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoic acid
Figure imgf000084_0001
Step i Following the procedure for step 1 of example 31 , 1.41 g (7.31 mmol) 2,3-dichloro-5- nitro-pyridine and methyl 3-(aminomethyl)-benzoate hydrochloride (1.77 g, 8.78 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) were reacted with 3.0 ml (17.6 mmol, 2.4 equiv.) of DIPEA in 2-propanol (15 ml) at 600C for 1.5 h. Removal of the solvent, addition of water, filtration and re- extraction of the filtrates gave methyl 3-((3-chloro-5-nitropyridin-2-ylamino) m ethyl )benzoate (2.27 g, 7.04 mmol, 96%) as yellow-brown solid. Ci4H12CIN3O4, MW: 321.7. TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4:1) Rf: 0.20.
1H-NMR (DMSO-CJ6): 8.88 (d, J = 2.4, 1H), 8.63 (t, J = 6.1 , 1H), 8.41 (d, J = 2.4, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.84 (dt, J = 1.4, 7.7, 1 H), 7.61 (d, J = 8.0, 1H), 7.47 (t, J = 7.7, 1H), 4.77 (d, J = 6.2, 2H), 3.84 (s, 3H). Step 2
Similar to the procedure described in step 2 of example 31 , 2.27 g (7.04 mmol) of methyl 3-((3-chloro-5-nitropyridin-2-ylamino)methyl)benzoate from the previous step were deprotonated with sodium hydride (60%) (310 mg, 7.74 mmol, 1.1 equiv.) in DMF (35 ml) for 1 h, and the mixture was then reacted with methyl iodide (0.57 ml, 9.15 mmol, 1.3 equiv.) at 00C for 0.5 h and at room temperature for 1 h. Workup as indicated followed by flash chromatography of the crude product afforded methyl 3- (((3-chloro-5-nitropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate (2.26 g, 6.74 mmol, 96%) as a dark yellow oil. Ci5H14CIN3O4 (MW 335.8).
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4:1) Rf: 0.24. 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.96 (d, J = 2.4, 1H), 8.45 (d, J = 2.4, 1 H), 7.92 (s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J = 7.5, 1H), 7.61 (d, J = 7.8, 1 H), 7.55 (dd, J = 7.6, 1 H), 5.00 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.20 (s, 3H).
Step 3
The procedure described in step 3 of example 31 was applied. Methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5- nitropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from the previous step (2.25 g, 6.71 mmol) was reacted with sodium dithionite (3.51 g, 20.1 mmol, 3 equiv.) in a mixture of methanol (80 ml) and water (16 ml) (5:1 ) at 900C for 1 h. Workup and purification by flash chromatography gave 745 mg (2.44 mmol, 36%) of methyl 3-(((5-amino-3- chloropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate as a viscous, dark brown oil. C15H16CIN3O2, MW: 305.8.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 1 :1) Rf: 0.15. APCI-MS: 306, 308 ([M+H]+).
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.97 (s, 1 H), 7.83 (dt, J = 1.4, 7.7, 1H), 7.64-7.58 (m, 2H), 7.46 (dd, J = 7.7, 1H), 7.07 (d, J = 2.5, 1H), 5.16 (s, 2H), 4.23 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 2.59 (s, 3H). Step 4
According to the procedure described in step 4 of example 31 , 399 mg (1.31 mmol) of methyl 3-(((5-amino-3-chloropyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from step 3 of example 32, and 3.5 ml (26.1 mmol, 20 equiv.) of isoamylnitrite in diiodomethane (7 ml) were reacted for 40 min at room temperature. Hydroiodic acid (25 μl) was added at 00C, and after the gas evolution had ceased, the mixture was stirred for additional 2 h at room temperature. Workup and purification as described gave 239 mg (0.57 mmol, 44%) of methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5-iodopyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate as pale yellow oil. C15H14CIIN2O2, MW: 416.6. TLC (hexane/EtOAc 4: 1 ) Rf : 0.46. APCI-MS: 417, 419 ([M+H]+).
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.35 (d, J = 2.0, 1H), 8.12 (d, J = 2.0, 1H), 7.93 (s,1 H), 7.86 (d, J = 7.7, 1H)1 7.59 (d, J = 7.9, 1H), 7.50 (dd, J = 7.6, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 2.86 (s, 3H). Step 5
Following the coupling procedure described for step 5 of example 31 , a suspension of methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5-iodopyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate from step 4 (233 mg, 0.56 mmol, 1 equiv.), (3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methanol (561 mg, 1.96 mmol, 3.5 equiv.), copper(l)-iodide (43 mg, 0.22 mmol, 0.4 equiv.), 1 ,10-phenanthroline (81 mg, 0.45 mmol, 0.8 equiv.) and Cs2CO3 (365 mg, 1.12 mmol, 2 equiv.) in anhydrous toluene (1 ml) under argon was heated at 1200C for 14.5h. Direct flash chromatography of the reaction mixture afforded coupling product (3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methyl 3-(((3-chloro-5-((3-(2,6- dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino) m ethyl )benzoate (303 mg, 0.37 mmol, 65%) as pale yellow-green resin. C40H35CI5N4O5, MW: 829.0.
TLC (hexane/EtOAc 1 :1) Rf: 0.56. APCI-MS: 576, 574 [M+MeOH]\ 286, 270.
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.77 (s, 1 H), 7.73 (d, J = 2.6, 1H), 7.64-7.47 (m, 8H), 7.44-7.37 (m, 2H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 4.31 (s, 2H), 3.52 (pseudo-quint, J = 7.0, 1H), 3.44 (pseudo-quint, J = 7.0, 1 H), 2.66 (s, 3H), 1.35 (d, J = 7.0, 6H), 1.32 (d, J = 7.0, 6H). Step 6
To a solution of coupling product synthesized in the previous step (298 mg, 0.36 mmol) in a 3:1:1-mixture of THF (7.5 ml), methanol (2.5 ml) and water (2.5 ml) was added LiOH H2O (151 mg, 3.60 mmol, 10 equiv.). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4.5 h. The THF and methanol were evaporated, water (2-3 ml) was added, and the mixture was neutralized with 1 N HCI (3.2 ml) at 00C. The pH value was then adjusted to pH 5 by careful addition of 1N HCI and saturated NaHCO3 solution. The sticky precipitate was dissolved in EtOAc, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2*10 ml). The combined organic layer was washed with 14-saturated NaCI solution and brine (10 ml each), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (EtOAc, then EtOAc/EtOH 4:1 to 1 :4) to afford the title compound 3-(((3-Chloro-5-((3- (2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)pyridin-2-yl)(methyl)amino) methyl)benzoic acid (159 mg, 0.28 mmol, 79%) as white solid. C27H24CI3N3O4 (MW 560.9).
TLC (EtOAc) Rf: 0.22. APCI-MS: 560, 562 ([M+H]+).
1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.92 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (d, J = 7.4, 1H), 7.74 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.65- 7.52 (m, 3H), 7.40 (d, J = 2.7, 1 H), 7.36 (d, J = 7.5, 1 H), 7.30 (dd, J = 7.5, 1H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 4.31 (s, 2H), 3.31 (sept, J = 7.0, 1H), 2.66 (s, 3H), 1.32 (d, J = 7.0, 6H).
Example 33
2-Hydroxyethyl 4-(((6-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)-2-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate
Figure imgf000087_0001
TBTU (0.177 g, 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 g, 0.55 mmol) were added to a solution of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic (example 28) (0.20 g, 0.34 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml). After 1h of stirring at room temperature ethan-1 ,2-diol 11 (0.633 g, 10.2 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture and stirring was continued for 7 h at 500C. The volatiles were removed in vacuo, the residue was diluted with water (6 ml) and extracted with chloroform, the extract was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound as a colourless oil. Yield: 0.040 g (18%).
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.39 (6H, d), 2.05 (1 H, br. s), 2.53 (3H, s), 3.47 (1 H, sept), 3.94 (2H, t), 4.01 (2H, s), 4.46 (2H, q), 5.18 (2H, s), 6.71 (1 H, d), 7.23-7.30 (1 H, m), 7.32-7.38 (2H, m), 7.43 (2H, d), 7.60 (1 H, d), 8.01 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.22 min; m/z [M+H]+ 638.3 (calculated: 638.1).
Example 34
2, 3-Dihydroxypropyl 4-(((6-((3-(2, 6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)-2-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)benzoate
Figure imgf000088_0001
TBTU (0.177 g, 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 g, 0.55 mmol) were added to a solution of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic acid (example 28) (0.20 g,
0.34 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml) and stirred at room temperature for 1h. Glycerol
(1.55 g, 16.8 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture which was stirred for 24 h at
700C. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue was taken up in chloroform, the mixture was washed with water, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound in 0.039 g (17%) yield as a colourless oil.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.39 (6H, d), 2.53 (3H, s), 3.47 (1 H, sept), 3.63- 3.72 (1H1 m), 3.72-3.80 (1H, m), 4.00 (2H, s), 4.01-4.10 (1 H, m), 4.41 (2H, t), 5.18 (2H, s), 6.71 (1 H, d), 7.23-7.31 (1H, m), 7.32-7.38 (2H, m), 7.44 (2H, d), 7.60 (1H, d), 7.99 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.11 min; m/z [M+H]+ 668.3 (calculated: 668.2).
Example 35
4-(((6-((3-(2, 6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)-N-(2,3- dihydroxypropyl)benzamide
Figure imgf000089_0001
Step i
TBTU (0.177 g, 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 g, 0.55 mmol) were added under stirring to a solution of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl methoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic acid (example 28) (0.20 g, 0.34 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml) and stirred for 1 h at room temperature. (2,2-dimethyl-[1 ,3]dioxolan-4-yl)-methylamine (0.054 g, 0.41 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h at room temperature. The volatiles were evaporated, the residue was redissolved in chloroform, washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 0.112 g (47%) of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl- isoxazol-4-ylmethoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl] -N-(2,3- dihydroxy-propyl)-benzamide as a colorless oil. Step 2
Trifluoroacetic acid (0.03 ml) was added to a solution of the product synthesised in step 1 (0.112 g, 0.16 mmol) in a 4:1 mixture THF-water (0.742 ml) at 00C and the reaction mixture was stirred for 8 h at room temperature, neutralized with 25% aqueous ammonia and evaporated. The residue was diluted with water, extracted with dichloromethane, the extract was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to obtain the title compound in 0.076 g (71%) yield as a colorless oil.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.39 (6H, d), 2.53 (3H, s), 3.47 (1 H, sept), 3.54 (2H, t), 3.72 (2H, t), 3.88 (1 H, quint), 4.00 (2H, s), 5.18 (2H, s), 6.66 (1 H, br. s), 6.71 (1H, d), 7.23-7.30 (1 H, m), 7.32-7.38 (2H, m), 7.42 (2H, d), 7.60 (1H, d), 7.73 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 1.99 min; m/z [M+H]+ 667.3 (calculated: 667.2).
Example 36
4-(((6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2-
(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl) benzamide
Figure imgf000090_0001
TBTU (0.088 g, 0.273 mmol) and triethylamine (0.028 g, 0.273 mmol) were added at stirring to a solution of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl methoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic acid (example 28) (0.10 g, 0.168 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml). After 1 h of stirring at room temperature 2-aminoethanol (0.012 g, 0.20 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (6 ml) and acetonitrile was removed in vacuo. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate, the extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound in 0.065 g (61%) yield as a colorless oil.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.40 (6H, d), 1.80 (1 H, br. s), 2.53 (3H, s), 3.40- 3.54 (1 H1 m), 3.62 (2H, q), 3.83 (2H, t), 4.00 (2H, s), 5.19 (2H, s), 6.57 (1H, s), 6.71 (1 H, d), 7.23-7.31 (1 H, m), 7.32-7.38 (2H, m), 7.41 (2H, d), 7.60 (1 H1 d), 7.73 (2H, d).
LC-MS: rt 2.05 min; m/z [M+H]+ 637.6 (calculated: 637.2). Example 37
4-(((6-((3-(2,6-Dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)(methyl)amino)methyl)-N-(2-(dimethylamino) ethyl)benzamide
Figure imgf000091_0001
TBTU (0.088 g, 0.273 mmol) and triethylamine (0.028 g, 0.273 mmol) were added under stirring to a solution of 4-[({6-[3-(2,6-dichloro-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-isoxazol-4-yl methoxy]-2-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-3-yl}-methyl-amino)-methyl]-benzoic acid (example 28) (0.10 g, 0.168 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (6 ml). After 1h N1,N1-dimethyl-ethane-1 ,2- diamine (0.018 g, 0.20 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 12 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (6 ml), acetonitrile was removed in vacuo, the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate, the extract was washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound in 0.035 g (31%) yield as a colorless oil.
1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3); δ (ppm) 1.42 (6H, d), 2.32 (6H, s), 2.50-2.63 (5H, m), 3.42-3.61 (3H, m), 4.01 (2H, s), 5.21 (2H, s), 6.73 (1H, d), 6.84 (1H, s), 7.23-7.32 (1 H, m), 7.33-7.40 (2H, m), 7.43 (2H, d), 7.61 (1H, d), 7.77 (2H1 d).
LC-MS: rt 2.05 min; m/z [M+H]+ 664.6 (calculated: 664.2). FRET activity assay
Determination of a ligand mediated cofactor peptide interaction to quantify ligand binding to the nuclear receptor Farnesoid X Receptor (FXR) was performed as follows: Preparation of human farnesoid X receptor (FXR) alpha ligand binding domain: The human FXRalpha ligand binding domain (LBD) was expressed in E. coli strain BL21(DE3) as an N-terminally glutathione-S-transferase (GST) tagged fusion protein. The DNA encoding the FXR ligand binding domain was cloned into vector pDEST15 (Invitrogen). Expression was under control of an IPTG inducible T7 promoter. The amino acid boundaries of the ligand binding domain were amino acids 187-472 of Database entry NM_005123 (RefSeq). Expression and purification of the FXR-LBD: An overnight preculture of a transformed E. coli strain was diluted 1 :20 in LB-Ampicillin medium and grown at 300C to an optical density of OD600=0.4-0.6. Gene expression was then induced by addition of 0.5 mM IPTG. Cells were incubated an additional 6h at 300C, 180 rpm. Cells were collected by centrifugation (7000 x g, 7 min, room temperature). Per liter of original cell culture, cells were resuspended in 10 ml lysis buffer (50 mM Glucose, 50 mM Tris pH 7.9, 1 mM EDTA and 4 mg/ml lysozyme) and left on ice for 30 min. Cells were then subjected to sonication and cell debris removed via centrifugation (22000 x g, 30 min, 4°C). Per 10 ml of supernatant 0.5ml prewashed Glutathione 4B sepharose slurry (Qiagen) was added and the suspension kept slowly rotating for 1 h at 4°C. Glutathione 4B sepharose beads were pelleted by centrifugation (2000 g, 15 sec, 4°C) and washed twice in wash buffer (25 mM Tris, 5OmM KCI, 4 mM MgCI2 and 1 M NaCI). The pellet was resuspended in 3 ml elution buffer per liter of original culture (elution buffer: 20 mM Tris, 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI2 and 80 mM glutathione added immediately prior to use as powder). The suspension was left rotating for 15 min at 4°C, the beads pelleted and eluted again with half the volume of elution buffer than the first time. The eluates were pooled and dialysed overnight in 20 mM Hepes buffer (pH 7.5) containing 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI2 as well as 1 mM dithiothreitol and 10% (v/v) glycerol. The protein was analysed by SDS- Page.
The method measures the ability of putative ligands to modulate the interaction between the purified bacterial expressed FXR ligand binding domain (LBD) and a synthetic biotinylated peptide based on residues 676-700 of SRC-1 (LCD2, 676-700). The sequence of the peptide used was B-CPSSHSSLTERHKILHRLLQEGSPS-COOH where the N-terminus was biotinylated (B). The ligand binding domain (LBD) of FXR was expressed as fusion protein with GST in BL-21 cells using the vector pDEST15. Cells were lysed by sonication, and the fusion proteins purified over glutathione sepharose (Pharmacia) according to the manufacturers instructions. For screening of compounds for their influence on the FXR-peptide interaction, the Perkin Elmer LANCE technology was applied. This method relies on the binding dependent energy transfer from a donor to an acceptor fluorophor attached to the binding partner of interest. For ease of handling and reduction of background from compound fluorescence LANCE technology makes use of generic fluorophore labels and time resolved detection Assays were done in a final volume of 2 5μl in a 384 well plate, in a Tris-based buffer (20 mM Tris-HCI pH 7,5; 60 mM KCI, 5 mM MgCI2; 35 ng/μl BSA), containing 20-60 ng/well recombinantly expressed FXR-LBD fused to GST, 200-600 nM N-terminally biotinylated peptide, representing SRC1 aminoacids 676-700, 200 ng/well Streptavidin-xlAPC conjugate(Prozyme) and 6-10 ng/well Eu W1024 - antiGST (Perkin Elmer). DMSO content of the samples was kept at 1%. After generation of the assay mix and diluting the potentially FXR modulating ligands, the assay was equilibrated for one hour in the dark at room temperature in FIA-plates black 384 well (Greiner). The LANCE signal was detected by a Perkin Elmer VICTOR2VTM Multilabel Counter The results were visualized by plotting the ratio between the emitted light at 665 nm and 615 nm. A basal level of FXR-peptide formation is observed in the absence of added ligand. Ligands that promote the complex formation induce a concentration-dependent increase in time-resolved fluorescent signal. Compounds which bind equally well to both monomeric FXR and to the FXR-peptide complex would be expected to give no change in signal, whereas ligands which bind preferentially to the monomeric receptor would be expected to induce a concentration-dependent decrease in the observed signal.
To assess the inhibitory potential of the compounds, IC50-values were determined. The following compounds of Table 1 exemplify such activity with "+" meaning 1 μM < IC50 < 10 μM and "++" meaning IC50 < 1 μM Table 1
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Physicochemical & ADME assays
Physicochemical and ADME parameters of examples of the present invention were determined and compared to those determined for FXR-modulating compounds A-D shown below which are state of the art and not part of the present invention.
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000096_0002
Aqueous solubility assay
Aqueous solubility of compounds was determined by nephelometry or by the shake- flask method as follows:
Protocol A, nephelometry method:
Solubility of compounds was measured in PBS (pH 7.4), 5% DMSO at 23°C. Nepheloskan Ascent (Thermo Electron Corporation) nephelometer was used for measurement of light scattering. Tested compounds were dissolved in DMSO to 10 mM. Prior to measurement the compounds were further diluted with PBS in the wells to final compound concentrations of 100, 70, 50, 35, 25, 17, 12 and <10 μg/ml. The plates were incubated at room temperature for 24 hours to reach equilibrium and the scattered light was measured. Assay validation: Aqueous solubility of acetylsalicylic acid was determined to validate the assay. It was found to be >100 μg/ml at the day of experiment, which corresponds to the reported literature value of at least 2,17 mg/ml (The Merck index, 10th edition).
The following compounds of Table 2 exemplify such solubility with "--" meaning solubility < 2 μM, "+" meaning 2 μM < solubility < 100 μM and "++" meaning solubility >100 μM.
Table 2
Figure imgf000097_0001
Protocol B, shake-flask method:
Sample preparation: Sample and standard solution preparation is performed by mixing equal volumes of acetonitrile containing the internal standard (1 μM final concentration) with sample and calibration standard solutions (100 μl). After vigorously shaking (10 seconds) the samples are centrifuged (600Og) for 5 minutes at 200C. Aliquots of the particle-free supernatants are transferred to 200 μl sample vials and subsequently subjected to LC-MS/MS. Assay procedure: Test concentration was 100 μM in 10 mM PBS buffer pH 7.4 with a final MeOH concentration of 1%. The volume of the incubation solution was 500 μl. Depending on each compound's solubility in MeOH, the stock concentration and the incubation concentration was adapted. The test solutions in quadruplicates were shaken at 300 rpm over a 20 hours period at room temperature, followed by centrifugation at 2000Og for 30 minutes to separate the solid phase. 100 μl of particle free sample are added to 100 μl acetonitrile containing the internal starndard. The aqueous solubility of the compounds was determined by measuring the concentration of the PBS buffer supernatant by HPLC-MS/MS. Aqueous solubilities of examples and reference compounds are listed in Table 3 below.
Table 3
Figure imgf000098_0001
PAMPA permeability assay
Artificial membrane permeability was determined as follows: Tested compounds were dissolved to 10 mM in 100% DMSO. Permeability of compounds was measured in PBS (pH 7.4), 5% DMSO at 23°C. Safire (Tecan) plate reader was used for measurement the UV/Vis absorption. Protocol: Dilute stocks of tested compounds and controls with PBS to 1.67 mM and mix well by pipeitting, add 280 μl of PBS, 5% DMSO to acceptor plate, add 5 μl of 2% L-α-Phosphatidylcholine suspension in dodecane to the membrane of donor plate, Immediately add 98 μl of PBS to donor plate and make the sandwich with acceptor plate. Add 42 μl of tested compounds and controls dilutions to acceptor plate, cover the plate, place into camera and incubate for 16 hours. Make the equilibrium plate, add 225 μl of PBS, 3,7% DMSO and 25 μl of tested compounds and controls dilutions to UV plate. After 16 hours pull the donor plate out and transfer 250 μl from acceptor plate to UV plate. Scan UV plate on Safire (Tecan) plate reader from 245 to 450 nM with step 5 nM. Permeability is reported in % of compound found in the receiver compartment after the incubation period. Applying this protocol, PAMPA permeabilities of examples and reference compounds were determined as shown in Table 4: Table 4
Figure imgf000099_0001
Determination of Caco-2 permeability
Caco-2 cells are widely used as an in vitro model for predicting human drug absorption. The Caco-2 cell line is derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, and when cultured, the cells spontaneously differentiate into monolayers of polarised enterocytes. The cells are seeded on TranswellTM plates and form a confluent monolayer over 20 days prior to the experiment. On day 20, the test compound is added to the apical side of the membrane and the transport of the compound across the monolayer is monitored over a 2 hour time period. To study drug efflux, it is also necessary to investigate transport of the compound from the basolateral compartment to the apical compartment. The permeability coefficient (Papp) is calculated from the following equation:
Papp = (dQ/dt)/(C0xA)
Where dQ/dt is the rate of permeation of the drug across the cells, CO is the donor compartment concentration at time zero and A is the area of the cell monolayer. Applying this protocol, Caco-2 permeability of examples and reference compounds was determined as shown in Table 5. Table 5
Figure imgf000100_0001
Plasma protein binding assay
Equilibrium dialysis is used to determine the extent of binding of a compound to plasma proteins. A semi-permeable membrane separates a protein-containing compartment from a protein-free compartment. The system is allowed to equilibrate at 37°C. The test compound present in each compartment is quantified by LC-MS/MS. The extent of binding is reported as a fraction unbound (fu) value which is calculated as fu = 1 - (PC -PF)/PC. PC = Test compound concentration in protein-containing compartment. PF = Test compound concentration in protein-free compartment. In addition to using whole plasma, the plasma protein binding assay can be performed using two other ratios of plasma (10% or 50% plasma in buffer v/v). The following equations are used to convert from a fraction unbound at 10% or 50% to a fraction unbound at 100%: fuioo% = fuio%/(10-9fUio%) fuioo% = fu5o%/(2-fu5o%).
Applying this protocol, plasmaprotein binding of examples and reference compounds was determined as shown in Table 6: Table 6
Figure imgf000101_0001
Human microsomal stability assay
Compound stability towards human liver microsomes was determined as follows: Human liver microsomal suspension (1 ml) prepared in reaction buffer at a concentration of 0.5 mg microsomal protein/ml was preincubated for 3 min at 37°C with a NADPH-generating system (10 mM glucose 6-phosphate, 1 mM NADP+, and 1 unit/ml yeast glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase). The final compounds concentration is 10 μM. Boiled microsomes (5 min) served as a control. Samples (50 μl) were then taken after 0, 5, 15, 30, 45, 120 min, into 200 μl acetonitrile, centrifuged for 15 min at 8000 x g to remove the protein pellet. Samples were analyzed for parent compound by HPLC. Method development: All samples for metabolic stability experiments were analyzed by HPLC. Only parent compounds were analyzed. Data analysis: The percentages of the parent compounds remaining was defined as the ratio of the parent compounds peak area at a specific point and the peak area at the first time point multiplied by 100%. The metabolic stability was evaluated by plotting the natural logarithm of the percentage parent compounds remaining versus time and performing linear regression and finally reported as clearance [μl/min/mg protein] which is reversed proportional to compound stability. Applying this protocol, Microsomal stability of examples and reference compounds was determined. (Table 7)
Table 7
Figure imgf000102_0001
Rat microsomal stability assay
Compound stability towards rat liver microsomes was determined as follows: The microsomes are incubated with the test compound at 37°C in the presence of the co- factor, NADPH, which initiates the reaction. The reaction is terminated by the addition of methanol. Following centrifugation, the supernatant is analysed on the LC-MS/MS. The disappearance of test compound is monitored over a 45 minute time period. The In peak area ratio (compound peak area/ internal standard peak area) is plotted against time and the gradient of the line determined. Finally, Intrinsic clearance CLιnt is computed by the following equations: elimination rate konstant (k) = -gradient; t-ι/2 (min) = 0.693 / k; V (μl/mg) = volume of incubation (μl)/protein in incubation (mg); CL,nt (μl/min/mg protein) = V*0.693 / ti/2. Compound clearance of examples and reference compounds is listed below in Table 8. Table 8
Figure imgf000103_0001
Mouse microsomal stability assay In vitro assays were performed to evaluate the metabolic stability of test items in liver microsomes originating from mouse. Preparation of working standards of test items: Working solutions were prepared for each calibration level by appropriate dilution of the corresponding stock solution, depending on each compound's solubility in acetonitrile or acetonitrile/water. Calibration standards were prepared by spiking 196 μl standard matrix with 4 μl of the corresponding working solution. The standard matrix consists of 0.15 mg/ml of microsomal protein in phosphate buffer (100 mM pH 7.4), the final standard solutions contain 2% acetonitrile. The samples and standard solutions were extracted with ethyl acetate, isolation of the compounds was performed by addition of 600 μl ethyl acetate containing the internal standard (0.1 μM) to 200 μl sample and calibration standard. After vigorously shaking (10 minutes) and centrifugation (5000 g) the aqueous phase was separated by freezing in an acetone/dry ice bath and the organic phase is evaporated to dryness using a vacuum centrifuge. Samples were reconstituted in 200 μl acetonitrile/water mix (1 :1 v/v) and subsequently subjected to LC-MS/MS. The incubation solution (180 μl) consisted of 90 μl of a microsomal suspension of 0.33 mg/ml of protein in phosphate buffer 100 mM pH 7.4 and 90 μl NADP-regenerating system. The reaction was initiated by the addition of 20 μl of test compound (in 20% acetonitrile) to the preincubated microsomes/buffer mix at 370C. 200 μl samples were removed from the incubation after 0, 5, 10, and 30 minutes and processed for ethyl acetate extraction as described above. Negative controls using boiled microsomes (boiling water bath, 25 minutes) without regenerating system were run in parallel. The amount of compound in the samples is expressed as percentage of remaining compound compared to time point zero (=100%). These percentages were plotted against the corresponding time points. Intrinsic clearance (CLint) and half-life (ti/2) estimates were determined using the rate of parent disappearance and following formula (1) and (2). (1 ) CLint = (-k)*Vχ fu. (2) ti/2=ln2/-k. Where CLiπt = intrinsic clearance [μl/min/mg protein], tV2 = half life [min], k = slope from the linear regression of log [test compound] versus time plot [1/min]. V = 6666.7; fu = unbound fraction in the blood. Applying this protocol gave microsomal stabilities for examples and reference compounds as listed below in Table 9:
Table 9
Figure imgf000104_0001
Rat hepatocyte stability assay
Compound stability towards rat hepatocytes was determined as follows: The hepatocytes are incubated with the test compound at 37°C. Samples are removed at the appropriate time points into methanol to terminate the reaction. Following centrifugation, the supernatant is analysed by LC-MS/MS. The disappearance of test compound is monitored over a 60 minute time period. The In peak area ratio (compound peak area/ internal standard peak area) is plotted against time and the gradient of the line determined. Finally, half life tv2 and Intrinsic clearance CLint is computed by the following equations: elimination rate konstant (k) = -gradient; ti/2 (min) = 0.693 / k; V (μl/106 cells) = volume of incubation (μl)/ number of cells (*106); CLint (μl/min/106CeIIs protein) = NΛ0.693 / t1/2. Applying this protocol, Microsomal stability of examples and reference compounds was determined as shown in Table 10. Table 10
Figure imgf000105_0001
Determination of Pharmacokinetic parameters in mice
Information on the rate and extent of absorption of the test compounds were generated using two distinct animal models, C57/BI/6J and C57/BLKS/J(mLeprdb/db) mice. Compounds were applied perorally by gavage at 10 mg/kg each to male 8 weeks old C57BL/6 mice and plasma concentrations of the test items were determined by LC-MS/MS (Table 11). Alternatively, compounds were applied perorally by gavage at 25 mg/kg each to 16 weeks old male C57/BLKS/J(ml_eprdb/db) mice and plasma concentrations of the test items were determined 120 min after gavage by LC- MS/MS (Table 12).
A solution of 20 mg/ml of each test item was produced by diluting them in the vehicle, 30% HPBCD (hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin) in 20 mM phosphate buffer pH7.0 (v/w). These solutions were stirred overnight at room temperature and heated to 60°C for 10 minutes, resulting in a full solubilization. The application was performed by administrating the solution perorally to the mice, with an application volume of 10 ml/kg. For each time point five mice were used. Blood samples were obtained by sacrificing animals for each time point followed by cardiac puncture. Blood samples were treated with Li-heparin during collection procedure and stored on ice until centrifugation at 645 g (5 min, 4°C). Plasma was harvested and kept at -20°C until being assayed. To 50 μl of mouse plasma sample 6 μl acetonitrile containing an internal standard was added. Samples were vigorously shaken and centrifuged for 10 minutes at 6000 g and 200C. An aliquot of the particle-free supernatant was transferred to 200 μl sampler vials and subsequently subjected to LC MS/MS for quantification. Plasma concentrations at various timepoints are given in Table 11 and Table 12 below.
Table 11
Figure imgf000106_0001
Table 12
Figure imgf000106_0002

Claims

Claims
1. A compound of formula (I)
Figure imgf000107_0001
and an enantiomer, diastereomer, tautomer, solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein
R1 and R2 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, fluorine, cyano, nitro, azido, NR5R6, OR5, SR5, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl and C3-C6 cycloalkyl; or R1 and R2 are together
=O or =S; or R1 and R2 may together form a 3-6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring which each can be unsaturated or saturated, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl group, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11 ;
R5 and R6 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, d- C6-alkyl and C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R5 and R6 together may form a 3-6- membered saturated heterocyclic ring, wherein the alkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
X is
Figure imgf000107_0002
in each formula (X1), (X2), (X4) R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -NR19R20, NR19S(O)mR20, NR19C(O)OR20, NR19C(O)R20, NR19C(O)NR19R20, OR19 OC(O)R19, S(O)1R19, SO2NR19C(O)R20, S(O)mNR19R20, C(O)R19, C(O)OR20, C(O)NR19R20 C(NR19)NR19R20 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; in each formula (X3)
R3 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, SO2R19, C(O)R19, C(O)OR19, C(O)NR19R20, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R19 and R20 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, C1- C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R19 and R20 together may form a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, wherein the CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R4 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, C1- C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR15R16 NR15SO2R16, NR15C(O)OR16, NR15C(O)R16,
NR15C(O)NR15R16, NR15C(NCN)NR15R16, OR15 OC(O)R15, S(O)1R15,
SO2NR15C(O)R16, S(O)mNR15R16, SC(O)R15, C(O)R15, C(O)OR15,
C(O)NR15R16 C(O)NHOR15, C(O)SR15 and C(NR15)NR15R16 wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; and further two substituents R4 can be taken together with the atom to which they attach to form a 4-7 membered carbocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, each of which is substituted or unsubstituted with one to five substituents R11 ;
R15 and R16 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, C1- C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl and C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R15 and R16 together may form a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11;
R11 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido, =0, =S, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR12R13, NR12S(O)mR13, NR12C(O)OR13,
NR12C(O)R13, NR12C(O)NR12R13, NR12C(NCN)NR12R13, =NOR12, - OR12 , OC(O)R12, S(O)1R12, SO2NR12C(O)R13, S(O)mNR12R13, SC(O)R12, C(O)R12, C(O)OR12, C(O)SR12, C(O)NR12R13 C(O)NOR12, and C(NR12JNR12R13; R12 and R13 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl and C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl may be unsubstituted or substituted with one to five fluorines and/or one or two substituents selected from OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, =0, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3J2; or R12 and R13 can be taken together with the atom to which they are attached to form a 4 to 6 membered carbocyclic, heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, each of which may be unsubstituted or substituted with one to five fluorines and/or one or two substituents selected from OH, OCH3, -OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, =0, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3)2; Q is O or NR7;
R7 is hydrogen, CrC3-alkyl or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
T is -O-, -S-, -N(R14)-, CH2 or CF2;
R14 is hydrogen, CrC3-alkyl or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
Y is selected from
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000110_0002
R8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, azido,
CrC6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, NR12R13 NR12S(O)mR13, NR12C(O)OR13,
NR12C(O)R13, NR12C(O)NR12R13, OR12 OC(O)R12, S(O)1R12, SO2NR12C(O)R13, S(O)mNR12R13, C(O)R12, C(O)OR12, C(O)NR12R13 and C(NR12JNR12R13' wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11 ;
L is a bond, -C(O)N(R10)-, -S(O)mN(R10)-, -G-N(R10)-, - N(R10)C(O)-, -N(R10)S(O)m-, -N(R10)-G-, -G-S-, -G-O-, -S-G-, or 0-G, or L is
Figure imgf000110_0003
R10 is hydrogen, Ci-C3-alkyl, or C3-C5 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms;
G is methylene or ethylene which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 fluorine atoms; Z is phenyl-A-R9, pyridyl-A-R9, pyrimidyl-A-R9 or pyridazyl-A-R9, wherein phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl or pyridazyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to three groups selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C2-C4 alkenyl, C2-C4 alkynyl, cyano, OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3J2; A is a bond, CH2, CHCH3, C(CH3J2 or CF2;
R9 is hydrogen, COOR17, CONR17R18, C(O)NHSO2R17, SO2NHC(O)R17, S(O)mR17, C(NR17JNR17R18, or tetrazole which is connected to A via the C-atom; R17 and R18 are independently from each other selected from hydrogen, C1-
C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl and C3-C6-cycloalkyl; or R17 and R18 together may form a 3-7-membered heterocyclic or heteroaromatic ring, wherein the CrC6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl, C3-C6- cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11 ; a IS 0 or 1 ; b is 1 , 2 or 3;
C is 1 or 2; i is 0 , 1 or 2; and m is 1 or 2.
2. The compound according to claim 1 , wherein
R1 and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, fluorine and C1-6 alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; or R1 and R2 are together =O or =S.
3. The compound according to claim 1 or 2, wherein Q is O or NH.
4. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 3, wherein in each formula (X1), (X2) and (X4)
R3 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, NR19R20 or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11; and in each formula (X3) R3 is hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11.
5. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 4, wherein
R4 is hydrogen, halogen, Ci-6 alkyl, 0-C1-C6 alkyl or CN, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted by one to five substituents R11.
6. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 5, wherein
T is O, CH2 or NR14.
7. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 6, wherein Y is selected from formula (Y1), (Y2 ) and (Y3).
8. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 7, wherein
R8 is hydrogen, halogen, CrC6-alkyl or O-CrC3-alkyl, wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with one to five substituents R11.
9. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 8, wherein
L is a bond, -C(O)N(R10)-, -S(O)1N(R10)-, -G-N(R10)- or -N(R10)-G; R10 is hydrogen or CrC6-alkyl; and i is 2.
10. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 9, wherein
Z is phenyl-A-R9, wherein phenyl is unsubstituted or substituted with one to three groups selected from halogen, cyano, C1-4 alkyl, OH, OCH3, OCH2F, OCHF2, OCF3, SCF3, NH2, NHCH3 and N(CH3)2.
11. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 10, wherein R9 is COOR17 or CONR17R18.
12. The compound according to any of claims 1 to 11 as a medicament.
13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one compound according to any of claims 1 to 11 and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and/or carrier.
14. Use of a compound according to any of claims 1 to 11 for the preparation of a medicament for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of diseases mediated by FXR.
15. The use according to claim 14 for chronic intrahepatic or some forms of extrahepatic cholestatic conditions, or liver fibrosis resulting from chronic cholestatic conditions or acute intraheptic cholestatic conditions.
16. The use according to claim 15, wherein the chronic intraheptic cholestatic conditions are primary biliary cirrhosis (PBC), primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC), progressive familiar cholestasis (PFIC), alcohol-induced cirrhosis and associated cholestasis, and the liver fibrosis is estrogen or drug induced cholestasis.
17. The use according to claim 14 for obstructive or chronic inflammatory disorders that arise out of improper bile composition.
18. The use according to claim 17, wherein the obstructive or chronic inflammatory disorders are cholelithiasis (cholesterol gallstones).
19. The use according to claim 14 for gastrointestinal conditions with a reduced uptake of dietary fat and fat-soluble dietary vitamins.
20. The use according to claim 14 for Inflammatory Bowel Diseases.
21. The use according to claim 20, wherein the inflammatory bowel diseases are Crohn's disease or Colitis Ulcerosa.
22. The use according to claim 14 for lipid and lipoprotein disorders.
23. The use according to claim 22, wherein the lipid and lipoprotein disorders are hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and atherosclerosis as a clinically manifest condition.
24. The use according to claim 14 for Type Il Diabetes.
25. The use according to claim 14 for clinical complications of Type I and Type Diabetes.
26. The use according to claim 25 wherein the clinical complications of Type I and Type Il Diabetes are Diabetic Nephropathy, Diabetic Retinopathy, Diabetic Neuropathies or Peripheral Arterial Occlusive Disease (PAOD) .
27. The use according to claim 14 for conditions and diseases which result from chronic fatty and fibrotic degeneration of organs due to enforced lipid and specifically triglyceride accumulation and subsequent activation of profibrotic pathways.
28. The use according to claim 27, wherein the conditions and diseases are Non- Alcoholic Steatohepatitis (NASH) and chronic cholestatic conditions in the liver, Glomerulosclerosis and Diabetic Nephropathy in the kidney, Macula Degeneration and Diabetic Retinopathy in the eye and Neurodegenerative diseases in the brain or Diabetic Neuropathies in the peripheral nervous system.
29. The use according to claim 14 for obesity and metabolic syndrome (combined conditions of dyslipidemia, diabetes and abnormally high body-mass index).
30. The use according to claim 14 for acute myocardial infarction, acute stroke, or thrombosis which occur as an endpoint of chronic obstructive atherosclerosis.
31. The use according to claim 14 for persistant infections by intracellular bacteria or parasitic protozoae.
32. The use according to claim 31 , wherein the bacterial or parasitic protozoae are selected from Mycobacterium spec. (Treatment of Tuberculosis or Lepra), Listeria monocytogenes (Treatment of Listeriosis), Leishmania spec. (Leishmaniosis), Trypanosoma spec. (Chagas Disease; Trypanosomiasis; Sleeping Sickness).
33. The use according to claim 14 for non-malignant hyperproliferative disorders.
34. The use according to claim 33, wherein the non-malignant hyperproliferative disorders are increased neointima formation after balloon vessel dilatation and stent application due to increased proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells
(VSMCs) Bening Prostate Hyperplasia (BPH), or other forms of scar tissue formation and fibrotisation.
35. The use according to claim 14 for malignant hyperproliferative disorders.
36. The use according to claim 35, wherein the malignant hyperproliferative disorders are cancer.
37. The use according to claim 14 for liver steatosis and associated syndromes, cholestatic and fibrotic effects that are associated with alcohol-induced cirrhosis or with viral-borne forms of hepatitis.
38. The use according to claim 37, wherein the liver steatosis associated syndrome is non-alcoholic steatohepatitis ("NASH").
39. A method for preparing a compound of formula (I) according to any of claims 1 to 11 comprising the step of reacting a compound of formula (XIII)
Z-L0 (XlIl) wherein Z is as defined in claim 1 and
Lc is halogen, NH2, N(R10)H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH2OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH1 SO2CI, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10)H, OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl; with a compound of formula (XIV)
R1 R2 LB*TXX <XIV> wherein
Y, T, X, R1 and R2 are as defined in claim 1 and
LB is halogen, NH2, N(R10)H, COCI, COF, CHO, CH2OH, COOH, C(O)NHNH2, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl, SH, SO2CI, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10)H,
OH, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OMe)2, B(OH)2, BF3 ", 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl or ethinyl.
40. The method according to claim 39, wherein Z, L and Y are as defined in claim 1 ,
T is O1
R1 and R2 are hydrogen and
X is X1 with Q being O and a being 0.
41. The method according to claim 39 or 40, comprising the further steps of reacting a compound of formula (IXa) or formula (IXb)
LA EN (IXa) u (IXb)
wherein LA is halogen, nitro, azido, CN, CF3, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-aryl, C(O)O-hetaryl,
SH, SMe, SO3H, G-NH2, G-N(R10)H, OH, O-alkyl, G-SH, G-OH, G-halogen, B(OH)2, B(Oalkyl)2 or ethinyl;
EN-H is OH, SH, NH2, N(R14)H, NH(CO)O-alkyl, NH(CO)O-aryl, NH(SO)2aryl, NH(SO)2alkyl, CH3 or CF2H; EL is halogen, OH, OC(O)alkyl, OC(O)aryl, O-aryl, O-pentafluorophenyl, O- sulfonylalkyl, O-sulfonylaryl, O-succinylimido, O-benzotriazolyl, nitro, azido, S- alkyl, SO2alkyl, SO2aryl, SC(O)alkyl, SC(O)aryl or cyano; with a compound of formula (IVa) or (IVb), respectively
Figure imgf000117_0001
wherein
R1, R2 and X are as defined in claim 1 and
EL and EN-H are as defined above; in order to obtain a compound of formula (XII)
Figure imgf000117_0002
wherein
Y, T, R1, R2 and X are as defined in claim 1; which is further reacted to a compound of formula (XIV) by replacing the LA moiety with a LB moiety.
42. The method according to claim 41 , wherein Y, R4, b and R3 are as defined in claim 1 ,
T is O,
R1 and R2 are hydrogen and X is X1 with Q being O and a being 0.
PCT/EP2007/007557 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds WO2008025540A1 (en)

Priority Applications (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BRPI0715448-8A BRPI0715448A2 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 FXR HYPEROCYCLIC CONNECTION COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, USE OF COMPOUND, AND METHOD TO PREPARE COMPOUND
AT07801978T ATE555105T1 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 HETEROCYCLIC FXR BINDING COMPOUNDS
CN2007800323928A CN101511813B (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic FXR binding compounds
CA2661861A CA2661861C (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds
JP2009525977A JP2010501610A (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic FXR binding compound
KR1020097006357A KR101103884B1 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds
MX2009002274A MX2009002274A (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds.
AU2007291514A AU2007291514B2 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic FXR binding compounds
US12/376,482 US20100184809A1 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic FXR Binding Compounds
EP07801978A EP2084147B1 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US84077506P 2006-08-29 2006-08-29
EP06018023A EP1894924A1 (en) 2006-08-29 2006-08-29 Heterocyclic FXR binding compounds
EP06018023.9 2006-08-29
US60/840,775 2006-08-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2008025540A1 true WO2008025540A1 (en) 2008-03-06

Family

ID=37698081

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2007/007557 WO2008025540A1 (en) 2006-08-29 2007-08-29 Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds

Country Status (11)

Country Link
US (1) US20100184809A1 (en)
EP (2) EP1894924A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2010501610A (en)
KR (1) KR101103884B1 (en)
CN (1) CN101511813B (en)
AT (1) ATE555105T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2007291514B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0715448A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2661861C (en)
MX (1) MX2009002274A (en)
WO (1) WO2008025540A1 (en)

Cited By (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009021740A2 (en) 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 Sanofis-Aventis Substituted tetrahydronaphthalenes, process for the preparation thereof and the use thereof as medicaments
US7618973B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2009-11-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyrazine derivatives
EP2128158A1 (en) 2008-05-26 2009-12-02 Phenex Pharmaceuticals AG Heterocyclic cyclopropyl-substituted FXR binding compounds
WO2011020615A1 (en) 2009-08-19 2011-02-24 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel fxr (nr1h4 ) binding and activity modulating compounds
US7902201B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2011-03-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyrazine derivatives
US7943619B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2011-05-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyridazine derivatives
WO2011107494A1 (en) 2010-03-03 2011-09-09 Sanofi Novel aromatic glycoside derivatives, medicaments containing said compounds, and the use thereof
WO2011157827A1 (en) 2010-06-18 2011-12-22 Sanofi Azolopyridin-3-one derivatives as inhibitors of lipases and phospholipases
US8163728B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2012-04-24 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyrazoles
US8173652B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2012-05-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazole-isoxazoles and isoxazole-isothiazoles
US8178522B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2012-05-15 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Thiazoles
US8222246B2 (en) 2009-04-02 2012-07-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Substituted isoxazoles
US8227461B2 (en) 2009-04-30 2012-07-24 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazoles
JP2012526072A (en) * 2009-05-07 2012-10-25 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Isoxazole-pyridine derivatives as GABA modifiers
EP2545964A1 (en) 2011-07-13 2013-01-16 Phenex Pharmaceuticals AG Novel FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US8389550B2 (en) 2009-02-25 2013-03-05 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazoles / O-pyridines with ethyl and ethenyl linker
WO2013037482A1 (en) 2011-09-15 2013-03-21 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Farnesoid x receptor agonists for cancer treatment and prevention
US8410104B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2013-04-02 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyridazines
US8415379B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2013-04-09 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyridines
JP2013519078A (en) * 2010-02-25 2013-05-23 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Method for determining binding constants of high affinity compounds
WO2014001280A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001281A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001282A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001279A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001278A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
US8785435B2 (en) 2011-10-20 2014-07-22 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Solid forms
EP3006939A1 (en) 2014-10-06 2016-04-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Histidine-rich Glycoprotein as a marker for hepatic Farnesoid X receptor activation
WO2016086218A1 (en) 2014-11-26 2016-06-02 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bile acid derivatives as fxr/tgr5 agonists and methods of use thereof
EP3034501A1 (en) 2014-12-17 2016-06-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Hydroxy containing FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
EP3034499A1 (en) 2014-12-17 2016-06-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Novel FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2016127924A1 (en) 2015-02-13 2016-08-18 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
WO2018024224A1 (en) * 2016-08-05 2018-02-08 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
US10011594B2 (en) 2015-06-03 2018-07-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 4-hydroxy-3-(heteroaryl)pyridine-2-one APJ agonists
WO2018153933A1 (en) 2017-02-21 2018-08-30 Genfit Combination of a ppar agonist with a fxr agonist
WO2018178260A1 (en) 2017-03-30 2018-10-04 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for reducing persistence and expression of episomal viruses
US10329286B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2019-06-25 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2019149158A1 (en) 2018-02-02 2019-08-08 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogenous tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
US10421730B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2019-09-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2020016443A1 (en) 2018-07-20 2020-01-23 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Difluoromethyl-phenyl triazoles as gaba receptor modulators
US10654797B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2020-05-19 North & South Brother Pharmacy Investment Company Limited Solid forms of an adamantyl compound, compositions and uses thereof
EP3711762A1 (en) 2013-09-11 2020-09-23 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) A farnesoid x receptor agonsits foruse and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of chronic hepatitis b virus infection
WO2021009332A1 (en) 2019-07-18 2021-01-21 Enyo Pharma Method for decreasing adverse-effects of interferon
US10988449B2 (en) 2017-04-12 2021-04-27 Il Dong Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Isoxazole derivatives as nuclear receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2021080013A1 (en) * 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of trek (twik related k+ channels) channel function
WO2021144330A1 (en) 2020-01-15 2021-07-22 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Use of fxr agonists for treating an infection by hepatitis d virus
US11225473B2 (en) 2019-01-15 2022-01-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2022152770A1 (en) 2021-01-14 2022-07-21 Enyo Pharma Synergistic effect of a fxr agonist and ifn for the treatment of hbv infection
US11478533B2 (en) 2020-04-27 2022-10-25 Novo Nordisk A/S Semaglutide for use in medicine
WO2022229302A1 (en) 2021-04-28 2022-11-03 Enyo Pharma Strong potentiation of tlr3 agonists effects using fxr agonists as a combined treatment
US11524005B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2022-12-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Solid forms of FXR agonists
US11833150B2 (en) 2017-03-28 2023-12-05 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating liver disease

Families Citing this family (33)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2930119C (en) 2010-10-19 2019-10-29 University Of Miami Assays, methods and kits for predicting renal disease and personalized treatment strategies
CU24152B1 (en) * 2010-12-20 2016-02-29 Irm Llc 1,2 OXAZOL-8-AZABICICLO [3,2,1] OCTANO 8 IL AS FXR MODULATORS
US20120309796A1 (en) 2011-06-06 2012-12-06 Fariborz Firooznia Benzocycloheptene acetic acids
IL253437A0 (en) * 2011-07-13 2017-09-28 Gilead Sciences Inc Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds
CN104244956B (en) * 2012-04-13 2020-04-17 L&F研究有限公司 Methods of using cyclodextrins
SI3336097T1 (en) * 2012-06-19 2021-07-30 Intercept Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Preparation of the non-crystalline form of obeticholic acid
CN104513213A (en) * 2013-09-28 2015-04-15 山东亨利医药科技有限责任公司 Fxr agonist
CA2959208C (en) 2014-08-29 2023-09-19 Tes Pharma S.R.L. Pyrimidine derivatives and their use as inhibitors of alpha-amino-beta-carboxymuconate-epsilon-semialdehyde decarboxylase
EP3524243A1 (en) 2014-09-24 2019-08-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating liver disease
US11311557B2 (en) 2015-02-06 2022-04-26 Intercept Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions for combination therapy
SG11201707263XA (en) 2015-03-31 2017-10-30 Enanta Pharm Inc Bile acid derivatives as fxr/tgr5 agonists and methods of use thereof
KR20170132879A (en) 2015-04-07 2017-12-04 인터셉트 파마슈티컬즈, 인크. Pharmaceutical compositions for combination therapy
CN105030771B (en) * 2015-04-10 2017-11-17 广州市爱菩新医药科技有限公司 Even application of the pyridine isoxazole class compound as farnesoid X receptor activator
KR101660638B1 (en) * 2015-04-22 2016-09-28 숙명여자대학교산학협력단 Composition for preventing or treating listeriosis comprising FXR inhibitor
WO2017189651A1 (en) 2016-04-26 2017-11-02 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
WO2017189663A1 (en) 2016-04-26 2017-11-02 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
WO2017189652A1 (en) 2016-04-26 2017-11-02 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
US10138228B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2018-11-27 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as FXR agonists and methods of use therof
US10144729B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2018-12-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole analogs as FXR agonists and methods of use thereof
US10149835B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2018-12-11 Elmore Patent Law Group, P.C. Isoxazole derivatives as FXR agonists and methods of use thereof
KR20190056436A (en) 2016-10-04 2019-05-24 이난타 파마슈티칼스, 인코포레이티드 Isoxazole analogs as FXR agonists and methods for their use
WO2018081285A1 (en) 2016-10-26 2018-05-03 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Urea-containing isoxazole derivatives as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
CN108614038B (en) * 2016-12-13 2022-05-17 亚宝药业集团股份有限公司 Method for determining related substances of obeticholic acid raw material medicine
WO2018133730A1 (en) * 2017-01-20 2018-07-26 四川科伦博泰生物医药股份有限公司 Heterocyclic compound, preparation method and use therefor
EA202091084A1 (en) 2017-11-01 2020-08-13 Бристол-Маерс Сквибб Компани Alkenic spirocyclic compounds as modulators of pharnesoid X-receptors
EP3704107B1 (en) 2017-11-01 2023-04-12 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Multicyclic compounds as farnesoid x receptor modulators
CN111511731B (en) 2017-11-01 2023-05-23 百时美施贵宝公司 Olefin compounds as modulators of the farnesol X receptor
WO2019118571A1 (en) 2017-12-12 2019-06-20 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole analogs as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
US10829486B2 (en) 2018-02-14 2020-11-10 Enanta Pharmacueticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as FXR agonists and methods of use thereof
IT201800007265A1 (en) * 2018-07-17 2020-01-17 ISOXAZOLS AS FXR RECEPTOR AGONISTS
WO2020231917A1 (en) 2019-05-13 2020-11-19 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isoxazole derivatives as fxr agonists and methods of use thereof
CN114144185A (en) 2019-05-30 2022-03-04 英特塞普特医药品公司 Pharmaceutical composition comprising an FXR agonist and a fibrate for the treatment of cholestatic liver diseases
CN114890940A (en) * 2022-04-21 2022-08-12 嘉兴瑞驰生物科技有限公司 Synthetic method of 6-methoxy-2-picolinic acid

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5883105A (en) * 1996-04-03 1999-03-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Inhibitors of farnesyl-protein transferase
WO2003015771A1 (en) * 2001-08-13 2003-02-27 Lion Bioscience Ag Fxr nr1h4 nuclear receptor binding compounds
WO2004048349A1 (en) * 2002-11-22 2004-06-10 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Farnesoid x receptor agonists

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE4219247A1 (en) * 1992-06-12 1993-12-16 Bayer Ag Use of 3-aryl-substituted 5-alkylisoxazole-4-carboxylic acid derivatives for the control of endoparasites, novel 3-aryl-substituted 5-alkylisoxazole-4-carboxylic acid derivatives and process for their preparation
AU6645998A (en) * 1996-12-23 1998-07-17 Du Pont Pharmaceuticals Company Oxygen or sulfur containing heteroaromatics as factor xa inhibitors
US6187797B1 (en) * 1996-12-23 2001-02-13 Dupont Pharmaceuticals Company Phenyl-isoxazoles as factor XA Inhibitors
AU730224B2 (en) * 1996-12-23 2001-03-01 Du Pont Pharmaceuticals Company Nitrogen containing heteroaromatics as factor Xa inhibitors
DE19947154A1 (en) * 1999-10-01 2001-10-04 Bayer Ag Substituted 2-thio-3,5-dicyano-4-aryl-6-aminopyridines and their use
EA014720B1 (en) * 2006-05-24 2011-02-28 Эли Лилли Энд Компани Compounds and methods for modulating fxr

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5883105A (en) * 1996-04-03 1999-03-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Inhibitors of farnesyl-protein transferase
WO2003015771A1 (en) * 2001-08-13 2003-02-27 Lion Bioscience Ag Fxr nr1h4 nuclear receptor binding compounds
WO2004048349A1 (en) * 2002-11-22 2004-06-10 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Farnesoid x receptor agonists

Cited By (79)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009021740A2 (en) 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 Sanofis-Aventis Substituted tetrahydronaphthalenes, process for the preparation thereof and the use thereof as medicaments
US7618973B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2009-11-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyrazine derivatives
US7902201B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2011-03-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyrazine derivatives
US7943619B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2011-05-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazolo-pyridazine derivatives
EP2128158A1 (en) 2008-05-26 2009-12-02 Phenex Pharmaceuticals AG Heterocyclic cyclopropyl-substituted FXR binding compounds
WO2009149795A2 (en) * 2008-05-26 2009-12-17 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Heterocyclic cyclopropyl-substituted fxr binding compounds
WO2009149795A3 (en) * 2008-05-26 2010-02-25 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Heterocyclic cyclopropyl-substituted fxr binding compounds
US8173652B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2012-05-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazole-isoxazoles and isoxazole-isothiazoles
US8389550B2 (en) 2009-02-25 2013-03-05 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazoles / O-pyridines with ethyl and ethenyl linker
US8222246B2 (en) 2009-04-02 2012-07-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Substituted isoxazoles
US8227461B2 (en) 2009-04-30 2012-07-24 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Isoxazoles
JP2012526069A (en) * 2009-05-05 2012-10-25 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Isoxazole-thiazole derivatives as GABAA receptor inverse agonists for use in the treatment of cognitive impairment
US8163728B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2012-04-24 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyrazoles
US8178522B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2012-05-15 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Thiazoles
US8410104B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2013-04-02 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyridazines
US8415379B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2013-04-09 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyridines
JP2012526072A (en) * 2009-05-07 2012-10-25 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Isoxazole-pyridine derivatives as GABA modifiers
US8357703B2 (en) 2009-05-07 2013-01-22 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Pyridines
CN102548974A (en) * 2009-08-19 2012-07-04 菲尼克斯药品股份公司 Novel FXR (NR1H4 ) binding and activity modulating compounds
CN102548974B (en) * 2009-08-19 2015-11-25 菲尼克斯药品股份公司 Novel FXR (NR1H4) combines and activity modulating compounds
EP2289883A1 (en) 2009-08-19 2011-03-02 Phenex Pharmaceuticals AG Novel FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US8952042B2 (en) 2009-08-19 2015-02-10 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
JP2013502389A (en) * 2009-08-19 2013-01-24 フェネックス ファーマシューティカルス アーゲー Novel FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
WO2011020615A1 (en) 2009-08-19 2011-02-24 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel fxr (nr1h4 ) binding and activity modulating compounds
JP2013519078A (en) * 2010-02-25 2013-05-23 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Method for determining binding constants of high affinity compounds
WO2011107494A1 (en) 2010-03-03 2011-09-09 Sanofi Novel aromatic glycoside derivatives, medicaments containing said compounds, and the use thereof
WO2011157827A1 (en) 2010-06-18 2011-12-22 Sanofi Azolopyridin-3-one derivatives as inhibitors of lipases and phospholipases
EP3246070A1 (en) 2011-07-13 2017-11-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating azoles
EP4400503A2 (en) 2011-07-13 2024-07-17 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US10485795B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2019-11-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US10220027B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2019-03-05 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US9820979B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2017-11-21 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
EP2545964A1 (en) 2011-07-13 2013-01-16 Phenex Pharmaceuticals AG Novel FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US9139539B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2015-09-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
US9539244B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2017-01-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
WO2013007387A1 (en) 2011-07-13 2013-01-17 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds
EP2987532A1 (en) 2011-07-13 2016-02-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds
WO2013037482A1 (en) 2011-09-15 2013-03-21 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Farnesoid x receptor agonists for cancer treatment and prevention
US8785435B2 (en) 2011-10-20 2014-07-22 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Solid forms
US9206160B2 (en) 2012-06-26 2015-12-08 Saniona Aps Phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the GABAA receptor complex
US9931329B2 (en) 2012-06-26 2018-04-03 Saniona A/S Phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the GABAA receptor complex
WO2014001281A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001282A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
US9475797B2 (en) 2012-06-26 2016-10-25 Saniona A/S Phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the GABAA receptor complex
WO2014001280A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001278A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
WO2014001279A1 (en) 2012-06-26 2014-01-03 Aniona Aps A phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the gabaa receptor complex
US9884848B2 (en) 2012-06-26 2018-02-06 Saniona A/S Phenyl triazole derivative and its use for modulating the GABAA receptor complex
EP3711762A1 (en) 2013-09-11 2020-09-23 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) A farnesoid x receptor agonsits foruse and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of chronic hepatitis b virus infection
EP3006939A1 (en) 2014-10-06 2016-04-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Histidine-rich Glycoprotein as a marker for hepatic Farnesoid X receptor activation
WO2016086218A1 (en) 2014-11-26 2016-06-02 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bile acid derivatives as fxr/tgr5 agonists and methods of use thereof
EP3034499A1 (en) 2014-12-17 2016-06-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Novel FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
EP3034501A1 (en) 2014-12-17 2016-06-22 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Hydroxy containing FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2016127924A1 (en) 2015-02-13 2016-08-18 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
US10011594B2 (en) 2015-06-03 2018-07-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 4-hydroxy-3-(heteroaryl)pyridine-2-one APJ agonists
US10336739B2 (en) 2015-06-03 2019-07-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 4-hydroxy-3-(heteroaryl)pyridine-2-one APJ agonists
US10774054B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2020-09-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US11739065B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2023-08-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US10329286B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2019-06-25 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US11247986B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2022-02-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US10421730B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2019-09-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US10981881B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2021-04-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
WO2018024224A1 (en) * 2016-08-05 2018-02-08 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
US10654797B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2020-05-19 North & South Brother Pharmacy Investment Company Limited Solid forms of an adamantyl compound, compositions and uses thereof
WO2018153933A1 (en) 2017-02-21 2018-08-30 Genfit Combination of a ppar agonist with a fxr agonist
US11833150B2 (en) 2017-03-28 2023-12-05 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating liver disease
WO2018178260A1 (en) 2017-03-30 2018-10-04 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for reducing persistence and expression of episomal viruses
US10988449B2 (en) 2017-04-12 2021-04-27 Il Dong Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Isoxazole derivatives as nuclear receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2019149158A1 (en) 2018-02-02 2019-08-08 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogenous tricyclic compounds and uses thereof in medicine
WO2020016443A1 (en) 2018-07-20 2020-01-23 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Difluoromethyl-phenyl triazoles as gaba receptor modulators
US11225473B2 (en) 2019-01-15 2022-01-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. FXR (NR1H4) modulating compounds
US11524005B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2022-12-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Solid forms of FXR agonists
US12102625B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2024-10-01 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Solid forms of FXR agonists
WO2021009332A1 (en) 2019-07-18 2021-01-21 Enyo Pharma Method for decreasing adverse-effects of interferon
WO2021080013A1 (en) * 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of trek (twik related k+ channels) channel function
WO2021144330A1 (en) 2020-01-15 2021-07-22 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Use of fxr agonists for treating an infection by hepatitis d virus
US11478533B2 (en) 2020-04-27 2022-10-25 Novo Nordisk A/S Semaglutide for use in medicine
WO2022152770A1 (en) 2021-01-14 2022-07-21 Enyo Pharma Synergistic effect of a fxr agonist and ifn for the treatment of hbv infection
WO2022229302A1 (en) 2021-04-28 2022-11-03 Enyo Pharma Strong potentiation of tlr3 agonists effects using fxr agonists as a combined treatment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2084147A1 (en) 2009-08-05
EP1894924A1 (en) 2008-03-05
JP2010501610A (en) 2010-01-21
US20100184809A1 (en) 2010-07-22
KR101103884B1 (en) 2012-01-12
CN101511813A (en) 2009-08-19
CA2661861A1 (en) 2008-03-06
BRPI0715448A2 (en) 2014-05-06
CN101511813B (en) 2012-12-12
AU2007291514B2 (en) 2011-06-16
CA2661861C (en) 2012-06-05
AU2007291514A1 (en) 2008-03-06
ATE555105T1 (en) 2012-05-15
EP2084147B1 (en) 2012-04-25
KR20090047549A (en) 2009-05-12
MX2009002274A (en) 2009-07-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2084147B1 (en) Heterocyclic fxr binding compounds
US8193192B2 (en) Heterocyclic FXR binding compounds
US10485795B2 (en) FXR (NR1H4) binding and activity modulating compounds
EP2128158A1 (en) Heterocyclic cyclopropyl-substituted FXR binding compounds
AU2010285175B2 (en) Novel FXR (NR1H4 ) binding and activity modulating compounds
NZ710770B2 (en) Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds
NZ620177B2 (en) Novel fxr (nr1h4) binding and activity modulating compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200780032392.8

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 07801978

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007291514

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2661861

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2009525977

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/002274

Country of ref document: MX

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2007291514

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20070829

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007801978

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020097006357

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: RU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12376482

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0715448

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20090227